THE CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY A Handbook for Scientologists BY L. RON HUBBARD

Ответить
auditor
Сообщения: 716
Зарегистрирован: 28 дек 2015, 12:01

THE CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY A Handbook for Scientologists BY L. RON HUBBARD

Сообщение auditor »

Professional auditing in any place on the planet http://webauditing.org http://0-48.ru
https://www.facebook.com/Galactic_Patro ... 206965424/ Auditor class X, skype: timecops
Web auditing in any place on the planet http://webauditing.org/


THE CREATION
OF
HUMAN ABILITY
A Handbook for Scientologists
BY
L. RON HUBBARD.Go your ways: behold, I send you forth as lambs among wolves.
Carry neither purse, nor scrip, nor shoes: and salute no man by the way.
And into whatsoever house ye enter, first say,
Peace be to this house.
And if the son of peace be there, your peace shall rest upon it: if not, it shall turn to you again.
And in the same house remain, eating and drinking such things as they give:
for the laborer is worthy of his hire.
Go not from house to house.
And into whatsoever city ye enter, and they receive you,
eat such things as are set before you:
And heal the sick that are therein, and say unto them
The kingdom of God is come nigh unto you.
Blessed are the eyes which see the things that ye see:
For I tell you, that many prophets and kings have desired to see those things which ye see,
and have not seen them;
and to hear those things which ye hear,
and have not heard them.
ST LUKE 10: 3-9, 23-24.TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE..........................................................................................1
THE AUDITOR’S CODE........................................................................4
THE CODE OF HONOR.........................................................................6
THE CODE OF A SCIENTOLOGIST .........................................................7
A SUMMARY OF SCIENTOLOGY...........................................................8
INTENSIVE PROCEDURE OUTLINE .......................................................13
ROUTE 1...........................................................................................14
ROUTE 2...........................................................................................15
CHART OF PROCESSES.......................................................................18
AUDITING COMMANDS FOR INTENSIVE PROCEDURE .............................19
ROUTE 1...........................................................................................20
R1-4.................................................................................................20
R1-5.................................................................................................20
R1-6.................................................................................................20
R1-7.................................................................................................20
R1-8.................................................................................................20
R1-9.................................................................................................21
R1-10...............................................................................................22
R1-11...............................................................................................22
R1-12...............................................................................................22
R1-13...............................................................................................22
R1-14...............................................................................................23
R1-15...............................................................................................23
ROUTE 2...........................................................................................24
R2-16...............................................................................................24
R2-17...............................................................................................25
R2-18...............................................................................................25
R2-19...............................................................................................25
R2-20...............................................................................................26
R2-21...............................................................................................27
R2-22...............................................................................................28
R2-23...............................................................................................28
R2-24...............................................................................................29
R2-25...............................................................................................30
R2-26...............................................................................................30
R2-27...............................................................................................31
R2-28...............................................................................................32
R2-29...............................................................................................32
R2-30...............................................................................................32
R2-31...............................................................................................33
R2-32...............................................................................................34
R2-33...............................................................................................35
R2-34...............................................................................................36
R2-35...............................................................................................38
R2-36...............................................................................................38
R2-37...............................................................................................39
R2-38...............................................................................................39
R2-39...............................................................................................40
R2-40...............................................................................................43
R2-41...............................................................................................44
R2-42...............................................................................................45
R2-43...............................................................................................46
R2-44...............................................................................................48
R2-45...............................................................................................48
R2-46...............................................................................................48.R2-47...............................................................................................49
R2-48...............................................................................................49
R2-49...............................................................................................50
R2-50...............................................................................................51
R2-51...............................................................................................51
R2-52...............................................................................................52
R2-53...............................................................................................52
R2-54...............................................................................................53
R2-55...............................................................................................53
R2-56...............................................................................................55
R2-57...............................................................................................56
R2-58...............................................................................................56
R2-59...............................................................................................57
R2-60...............................................................................................59
R2-61...............................................................................................60
R2-62...............................................................................................61
R2-63...............................................................................................61
R2-64...............................................................................................62
R2-65...............................................................................................62
R2-66...............................................................................................63
R2-67...............................................................................................63
R2-68...............................................................................................63
R2-69...............................................................................................63
R2-70...............................................................................................64
R2-71...............................................................................................64
R2-72...............................................................................................64
R2-73...............................................................................................65
R2-74...............................................................................................65
R2-75...............................................................................................65
L’ENVOI...........................................................................................66
CHANGE OF SPACE PROCESSING ........................................................68
SOP 8-D............................................................................................69
OUTLINE OF LECTURES 1-3 OF PROFESSIONAL COURSE .........................70
THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY - THE SCIENCE OF CERTAINTY............................72
FOREWORD ......................................................................................72
THE FACTORS...................................................................................73
THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY.......................................................................75
THE TRIANGLE OF CERTAINTY OF AWARENESS ....................................77
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES .................................................88
APPENDIX TO SOP 8 NO. 1...................................................................91
APPENDIX NO. 2 SOP 8.......................................................................92
CERTAINTY PROCESSING...................................................................92
SHORT 8...........................................................................................95
SOP 8-C THE REHABILITATION OF THE HUMAN SPIRIT...........................96
THE USE OF SOP 8-C ..........................................................................99
SOP 8-C FORMULAS AND STEPS OPENING PROCEDURE ..........................100
GLOSSARY.......................................................................................103
GROUP PROCESSING.........................................................................105
GLOSSARY ADAPTED AND EXPANDED BY W.B.B. JR. .............................107.PREFACE
TO ALL HASI SCHOOLS AND BRITISH ASSOCIATES
SUBJECT: TRAINING
The training program of the HASI was stabilized during the seven Clinical Course
units. This has been developed into the HASI training schedule, and it is expected that this
schedule will be fitted into the training programs under use with no further modification than is
absolutely necessary to fit the peculiar needs of the school.
This training course embraces the grade of Hubbard Certified Auditor, Hubbard
Professional Auditor, Bachelor of Scientology and Doctor of Scientology. There is no
difference amongst these degrees as to the procedures employed or methods of instruction. The
difference of course level amongst these ratings consists of the amount of theory and expansion
given to the subject of Intensive Procedure. In all cases, for all courses, we wish at the end of a
course to have an auditor in good personal condition who understands thoroughly that the
processes enumerated in Intensive Procedure are workable and that they will resolve the
problems he faces in preclears and groups and the conviction on the auditor’s part that at least
some of these processes can be used expertly by himself. The auditor’s examination for
certification in any grade is based upon the definitions and theories underlying those processes
contained in The Creation of Human Ability -- A Handbook for Scientologists. The
examination should include history, general theory, and conversance with the various
publications of Scientology as well as Dianetics. The primary goal of an HCA or HPA school
is outlined in the first sentence above. When this has been accomplished, that level of school
can consider that it has accomplished its mission.
The primary text of any school of any level is now The Creation of Human Ability -- A
Handbook for Scientologists. A secondary text, but almost equal in importance is Scientology:
Group Auditor’s Handbook. Concentration on these two publications should be extreme. Only
those tapes which will actually supplement these manuals should be employed. Particularly in
the HCA -- HPA course, the instructor should be severely reluctant to impart any further data
of any kind than that contained in these manuals and the tapes supporting them. A forthcoming
popular text book on Scientology is designed to embrace little more in theory and practice than
that found crowded into the two handbooks; thus when a person who has read the popular text
turns to a school or auditor for training he will discover himself studying in a far more intense
form that material on which he has already agreed.
The basic theory in which the student is to be instructed is as follows: Considerations
take rank over the mechanics of space, energy, and time and that these mechanics are the
product of agreed-upon considerations which life mutually holds. That the mechanics have
taken such precedent in man that they have become more important than the considerations and
overpower his ability to act freely in the framework of mechanics, which is to say that the
picture man presents is an inverted one. That the goal of processing is to bring an individual
into such thorough communication with the physical universe that he can regain the power and
ability of his own postulates. That Scientology is the science of knowing how to know answers
and that a Scientologist is expected to be able to resolve problems in a great many specialized
fields of which auditing is the first field he addresses so as to be conversant with and capable in
the phenomena of life. That in a world every day more violently impressed with mechanics,
chaos may be expected to ensue on a national and community level by many reasons which
incidentally include atomic fission. That the role of a Scientologist is to impede this
disintegration if possible, but if it occurs to be ready to pick up the pieces. That the
Scientologist has no specialized political or religious convictions beyond those dictated by
wisdom and his own early training. That the total empire to which a Scientologist aspires is the
empire of wisdom.
That an auditor is expected to follow the Auditor’s Code 1954 and the Code of
Scientologists, and that he is expected to know these Codes by heart. That the only scarcity of
preclears which will occur is through his own indigence, and his procurement of preclears or
1.groups does not depend upon the industry of other auditors but of himself. That L. Ron
Hubbard is a human being. The student should be instructed as well in the Organization and
functions of the HASI in various certifications and their meaning and in his legal status.
His instruction should begin with the lecture on Scientology and what it is and with an
immediate assignment to auditing. This assignment should consist of the most elementary
possible technique in order to accustom the auditor into achieving a two-way communication
with the preclear. He should be maintained on such an assignment until such time as the
instructor is satisfied that he can deliver the auditing commands and maintain his two-way
communication with the preclear without falling into any deeper significances and until he has a
complete and positive understanding of a communication lag and how to flatten one out. The
auditing commands to be used in this first step are, ‘Something you wouldn’t mind
remembering’, ‘Something you wouldn’t mind forgetting’. It is completely vital that the student
understand the mechanism of communication lag and its definition that it is the length of time
between the moment the auditor poses the question and the moment when that exact question
posed is answered positively by the preclear no matter whether silence or talk or incorrect
answers occurred in the interim.
Only when the student has become at ease with the above and perfectly comprehensent
is he permitted to go further in his training. The next step consists of Opening Procedure of 8-
C. The three parts of this are given him one at a time to audit on his fellow students until he has
become expert and assured in performing each part. At this same time he must become assured
as well of the workability of this process and that it is the only process he must ever employ on
psychotics and neurotics. The student must also be made to understand physical
communication lag as just another kind of communication lag. And he must become convinced
that he must flatten physical communication lags by continuing to use the command which
produced them. He must develop precision in his rendition and all sloppiness or carelessness in
the running of this process must be ironed out by the instructor. The lecture material at this time
should strenuously and repetitively take up the Auditor’s Code with examples until the student
understands it thoroughly.
The next process in which the student is to be indoctrinated is Opening Procedure by
Duplication. He is expected to do this for many hours. He is expected to have this run on him
for many hours. After this the Auditor’s Code is taken up again. And only at this point should
general theory or other data subjects be undertaken by the instructor, either in his own lectures
or by tapes.
Once the student is entirely comfortable and familiar and precise with Opening
Procedure by Duplication he is instructed in Remedying Havingness and Spotting Spots in
Space. Remedying Havingness is emphasized and is senior to Spotting Spots in Space and is
taken up in lecture in its various forms before the auditor is permitted to run Spotting Spots in
Space. When the auditor has mastered Acceptance Level, Rejection Level and ‘Things that you
wouldn’t mind occupying your space’ he is then turned loose to audit Spotting Spots in Space
and the Remedy of Havingness using this to clean up various areas or old auditing in his
preclears. He is to run this process until he is convinced of its workability and his ability to use
it and until he can honestly classify it as his chief emergency assist tool.
Now that the student can remedy havingness on preclears, he is permitted to run
Consideration in the form of Significances, having preclears put significances into things. Only
when the student has learned to audit significances and has had all the processes he is being
taught as above run upon him is it particularly safe to engage upon much theory or upon more
complex processes, for the student turned loose to consider at will may otherwise begin to
make nothing out of preclears and mountainous somethings out of processes.
At this point, Granting of Beingness in the form given in the Appendix of Issue One of
the Handbook for Scientologists should be run thoroughly by the student and on the student
and he should hear the LRH lecture on that subject from the Seventh Clinical Course. For until
this is remedied, our student will have difficulty, most likely, with his fellow students by being
2.himself ‘the only one’ who can grant life. He will also, to some slight degree perhaps, be at
war with the subject and his instructors until this is remedied.
Only when all of the above has been accomplished, and with certainty, should the
student be embarked upon the use of Intensive Procedure as given, be initiated into the
mysteries of exteriorization and the general data of earlier Scientology. We must be very
definite at this point that it would be far, far better to turn out a student who had learned the
steps prior to studying the Handbook itself, as given above, and graduate with those steps
firmly in his grasp than to cover a multitude of subjects and processes in Scientology on which
he had a poor reality by the end of the course.
Our course goal is to push the student of the HCA-HPA level as far forward as possible
in his period of training into the Handbook for Scientologists and the Group Auditor’s
Handbook, but to progress him in such a way as to teach him nothing further than he has been
taught until we are sure that he has excellent data workability and use reality on what he has
been taught at that point. This we learned in the Advanced Clinical Courses was an absolute
necessity in order to turn out auditors. It is better for us to have auditors able to use well
Opening Procedure of 8-C than auditors who can use every technique we have poorly and
ineffectually.
The training materials for the HCA-HPA course should include the ‘Professional
Course Lectures’ by LRH made in July 1954.
The student should clearly understand that training which has been done is not
necessarily the retraining which is being and will be done. He should understand that the
exigencies of Scientology were such as to turn out as good auditors as we could with what we
had to hand and that we are just now stabilized in training and that we expect far more from him
than we have ever expected from any auditor in the past.
Sincerely,
L. RON HUBBARD
15 July 1954
3.THE AUDITOR’S CODE
1954
An auditor must observe the Auditor’s Code if he intends to produce beneficial results
in a preclear. The auditor’s attention is very strongly called to Sections 1 and 13. Section 13
contains the difference between a bad auditor and a good auditor.
Whereas the whole Code is important, Section 13 is vitally important, so much so that
an auditor, not understanding it, will not produce good results in a preclear. Section 13 means
that an auditor must not change the process just because the preclear’s perception or
communication is changing. A bad auditor will change the process every time the preclear starts
to change.
This is the auditor obsessively duplicating the preclear. A good auditor will run a
process until it no longer produces change in the preclear, and only then will go to a new
process. A bad auditor can always be estimated by the number of processes he uses on a
preclear, for any process in modern procedures, consistently used, will produce considerable
change.
When the auditor changes a process just because the preclear starts to change, we call
this ‘Auditor Q-and-A-ing’. It is a very bad manifestation.
1 Do not evaluate for the preclear
2 Do not invalidate or correct the preclear’s data
3 Use the processes which improve the preclear’s case
4 Keep all appointments once made
5 Do not process a preclear after 10:00 p.m.
6 Do not process a preclear who is improperly fed
7 Do not permit a frequent change of auditors
8 Do not sympathize with the preclear
9 Never permit the preclear to end the session on his own independent decision
10 Never walk off from a preclear during a session
11 Never get angry with a preclear
12 Always reduce every communication lag encountered by continued use of the
same question or process
13 Always continue a process as long as it produces change, and no longer
14 Be willing to grant beingness to the preclear
15 Never mix the processes of Scientology with those of various other practices
16 Maintain two-way communication with the preclear
17 Never use Scientology to obtain personal and unusual favors or unusual
compliance from the preclear for the auditor’s own personal profit
4.18 Estimate the current case of your preclear with reality and do not process
another imagined case
19 Do not explain, justify or make excuses for any auditor mistakes whether real or
imagined
The Auditor’s Code was evolved from years of observing processing. It is the technical
code of Scientology. It contains the important errors which harm cases. It could be called the
moral code of Scientology.
5.THE CODE OF HONOR
No one expects the Code of Honor to be closely and tightly followed.
An ethical code cannot be enforced. Any effort to enforce the Code Of Honor would
bring it into the level of a moral code. It cannot be enforced simply because it is a way of life
which can exist as a way of life only as long as it is not enforced. Any other use but self-determined
use of the Code of Honor would, as any Scientologist could quickly see, produce a
considerable deterioration in a person. Therefore its use is a luxury use, and which is done
solely on self-determined action, providing one sees eye to eye with the Code of Honor.
1 Never desert a comrade in need, in danger or in trouble
2 Never withdraw allegiance once granted
3 Never desert a group to which you owe your support
4 Never disparage yourself or minimize your strength or power
5 Never need praise, approval or sympathy
6 Never compromise with your own reality
7 Never permit your affinity to be alloyed
8 Do not give or receive communication unless you yourself desire it
9 Your self-determinism and your honor are more important than your immediate
life
10 Your integrity to yourself is more important than your body
11 Never regret yesterday. Life is in you today, and you make your tomorrow
12 Never fear to hurt another in a just cause
13 Don’t desire to be liked or admired
14 Be your own adviser, keep your own counsel and select your own decisions
15 Be true to your own goals
6.THE CODE OF A SCIENTOLOGIST
The Code of a Scientologist was evolved to safeguard Scientologists in general, and is
subscribed to by leading Scientologists. The Committee of Examination and Services of the
HASI has accepted it as an enforceable code.
As a Scientologist, I pledge myself to the Code of Scientology for the good of all.
1 To hear or speak no word of disparagement to the press, public or preclears concerning
any of my fellow Scientologists, our professional organization or those whose names
are closely connected to this science
2 To use the best I know of Scientology to the best of my ability to better my preclears,
groups and the world
3 To refuse to accept for processing and to refuse to accept money from any preclear or
group I feel I cannot honestly help
4 To deter to the fullest extent of my power anyone misusing or degrading Scientology to
harmful ends
5 To prevent the use of Scientology in advertisements of other products
6 To discourage the abuse of Scientology in the press
7 To employ Scientology to the greatest good of the greatest number of dynamics
8 To render good processing, sound training and good discipline to those students or
peoples entrusted to my care
9 To refuse to impart the personal secrets of my preclears
10 To engage in no unseemly disputes with the uninformed on the subject of my
profession
11 To completely refrain from discussing the case of another auditor’s preclear with that
preclear, or within his hearing
7.A SUMMARY OF SCIENTOLOGY
Scientology is the science of knowing how to know answers. It is a wisdom in the
tradition of ten thousand years of search in Asia and Western Civilization. It is the Science of
Human Affairs which treats the livingness and beingness of Man, and demonstrates to him a
pathway to greater freedom.
Subjects which were consulted in the organization and development of Scientology
include the Veda; the Tao, by Lao Tzu; the Dharma and the Discourses of Gautama Buddha; the
general knowingness about life extant in the lamasaries of the Western Hills of China; the
technologies and beliefs of various barbaric cultures, the various materials of Christianity,
including St Luke; the mathematical and technical methodologies of the early Greeks, Romans,
and Arabians; the physical sciences, including what is now known as nuclear physics,
including the various speculations of Western Philosophers such as Kant, Nietzsche,
Schopenhauer, Herbert Spencer, and Dewey, and the various technologies extant in the
civilization of both the Orient and Occident in the first half of the twentieth century. Scientology
is an organization of the pertinancies which are mutually held true by all men in all times, and
the development of technologies which demonstrate the existence of new phenomena not
hitherto known, which are useful in creating states of beingness considered more desirable by
man.
There are two distinct divisions in Scientology. The first is philosophic, the second is
technical. Under the philosophic heading one discovers the ways and means of forming new
ways of life and of evaluating or creating standards of livingness and beingness. By this
knowingness alone, and without processing, it should be understood clearly that a new way of
life could be created, or an old way of life could be understood and better endured or altered.
Under the technical division we have a long series of developed processes which, applied
immediately and directly to life or an organism thereof, produce changes at the will of the
practitioner.
Scientology concludes and demonstrates certain truths. These truths might be
considered to be the highest common denominators of existence itself.
The following summary of these truths has the aspect of precision observations rather
than philosophic hazardings. When treated as precision observations, many results occur.
When regarded as philosophic opinions, only more philosophy results. Considerations take
rank over the mechanics of space, energy, and time. By this it is meant that an idea or opinion
is, fundamentally, superior to space, energy, and time, or organizations of form, since it is
conceived that space, energy, and time are themselves broadly agreed-upon considerations.
That so many minds agree brings about Reality in the form of space, energy, and time. These
mechanics, then, of space, energy, and time are the product of agreed-upon considerations
mutually held by life.
The aspects of existence when viewed from the level of Man, however, is a reverse of
the greater truth above for Man works on the secondary opinion that mechanics are real, and
that his own personal considerations are less important than space, energy, and time. This is an
inversion. These mechanics of space, energy, and time, the forms, objects and combinations
thereof, have taken such precedent in Man that they have become more important than
considerations as such, and so his ability is overpowered and he is unable to act freely in the
framework of mechanics. Man, therefore, has an inverted view, whereas, considerations such
as those he daily makes are the actual source of space, energy, time and forms, Man is
operating so as not to alter his basic considerations, he therefore invalidates himself by
supposing another determinism of space, energy, time, and form. Although he is part of that
which created these, he gives them such strength and validity that his own considerations
thereafter must fall subordinate to space, energy, time, and form, and so he cannot alter the
Universe in which he dwells.
8.The freedom of an individual depends upon that individual’s freedom to alter his
considerations of spacer energy, time, and forms of life and his roles in it. If he cannot change
his mind about these, he is then fixed and enslaved amidst barriers such as those of the physical
universe, and barriers of his own creation. Man thus is seen to be enslaved by barriers of his
own creation. He creates these barriers himself, or by agreeing with things which hold these
barriers to be actual.
There is a basic series of assumptions in processing, which assumptions do not alter the
philosophy of Scientology. The first of these assumptions is that Man can have a greater
freedom. The second is that so long as he remains relatively sane, he desires a greater freedom.
And the third assumption is that the auditor desires to deliver a greater freedom to that person
with whom he is working. If these assumptions are not agreed upon and are not used, then
auditing degenerates into ‘the observation of effect’, which is, of course, a goal-less, soulless
pursuit, and is, indeed, a pursuit which has degraded what is called modern science.
The goal of processing is to bring an individual into such thorough communication with
the physical universe that he can regain the power and ability of his own considerations
(postulates).
A Scientologist is one who understands life. His technical skill is devoted to the
resolution of the problems of life.
The technical information of the Scientologist includes the following, which are a list of
usable or self-evident truths as revised from the earlier Logics and Axioms.
1. LIFE IS BASICALLY A STATIC.
Definition: a Life Static has no mass, no motion, no wavelength, no location in space or
in time. It has the ability to postulate and to perceive.
2. THE STATIC IS CAPABLE OF CONSIDERATIONS, POSTULATES, AND
OPINIONS.
3. SPACE, ENERGY, OBJECTS, FORM, AND TIME ARE THE RESULT OF
CONSIDERATIONS MADE AND/OR AGREED UPON OR NOT BY THE STATIC,
AND ARE PERCEIVED SOLELY BECAUSE THE STATIC CONSIDERS THAT IT
CAN PERCEIVE THEM.
4. SPACE IS A VIEWPOINT OF DIMENSION.
5. ENERGY CONSISTS OF POSTULATED PARTICLES IN SPACE.
6. OBJECTS CONSIST OF GROUPED PARTICLES.
7. TIME IS BASICALLY A POSTULATE THAT SPACE AND PARTICLES WILL
PERSIST.
8. THE APPARENCY OF TIME IS THE CHANGE OR POSITION OF PARTICLES IN
SPACE.
9. CHANGE IS THE PRIMARY MANIFESTATION OF TIME.
10. THE HIGHEST PURPOSE IN THE UNIVERSE IS THE CREATION OF AN
EFFECT.
11. THE CONSIDERATIONS RESULTING IN CONDITIONS OF EXISTENCE ARE
FOUR-FOLD:
9.(a) As-is-ness IS THE CONDITION OF IMMEDIATE CREATION WITHOUT
PERSISTENCE, AND IS THE CONDITION OF EXISTENCE WHICH EXISTS AT
THE MOMENT OF CREATION AND THE MOMENT OF DESTRUCTION, AND IS
DIFFERENT FROM OTHER CONSIDERATIONS IN THAT IT DOES NOT
CONTAIN SURVIVAL.
(b) Alter-is-ness IS THE CONSIDERATION WHICH INTRODUCES CHANGE,
AND THEREFORE TIME AND PERSISTENCE INTO AN As-is-ness TO OBTAIN
PERSISTENCY.
(c) Is-ness IS AN APPARENCY OF EXISTENCE BROUGHT ABOUT BY THE
CONTINUOUS ALTERATION OF AN As-is-ness. THIS IS CALLED, WHEN
AGREED UPON, REALITY.
(d) Not-is-ness IS THE EFFORT TO HANDLE Is-ness BY REDUCING ITS
CONDITION THROUGH THE USE OF FORCE. IT IS AN APPARENCY AND
CANNOT ENTIRELY VANQUISH AN Is-ness.
12. THE PRIMARY CONDITION OF ANY UNIVERSE IS THAT TWO SPACES,
ENERGIES, OR OBJECTS MUST NOT OCCUPY THE SAME SPACE. WHEN
THIS CONDITION IS VIOLATED (PERFECT DUPLICATE) THE APPARENCY
OF ANY UNIVERSE OR ANY PART THEREOF IS NULLED.
13. THE CYCLE OF ACTION OF THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE IS: CREATE,
SURVIVE (PERSIST), DESTROY.
14. SURVIVAL IS ACCOMPLISHED BY ALTER-IS-NESS AND NOT-IS-NESS, BY
WHICH IS GAINED THE PERSISTENCY KNOWN AS TIME.
15. CREATION IS ACCOMPLISHED BY THE POSTULATION OF AN AS-IS-NESS.
16. COMPLETE DESTRUCTION IS ACCOMPLISHED BY THE POSTULATION OF
THE AS-IS-NESS OF ANY EXISTENCE AND THE PARTS THEREOF.
17. THE STATIC, HAVING POSTULATED AS-IS-NESS, THEN PRACTICES
ALTER-IS-NESS, AND SO ACHIEVES THE APPARENCY OF IS-NESS AND SO
OBTAINS REALITY.
18. THE STATIC, IN PRACTISING NOT-IS-NESS, BRINGS ABOUT THE
PERSISTENCE OF UNWANTED EXISTENCES, AND SO BRINGS ABOUT
UNREALITY, WHICH INCLUDES FORGETFULNESS, UNCONSCIOUSNESS,
AND OTHER UNDESIRABLE STATES.
19. BRINGING THE STATIC TO VIEW AS-IS ANY CONDITION DEVALUATES
THAT CONDITION.
20. BRINGING THE STATIC TO CREATE A PERFECT DUPLICATE CAUSES THE
VANISHMENT OF ANY EXISTENCE OR PART THEREOF.
A perfect duplicate is an additional creation of the object, its energy, and space, in its
own space, in its own time using its own energy. This violates the condition that two
objects must not occupy the same space, and causes vanishment of the object.
21. UNDERSTANDING IS COMPOSED OF AFFINITY, REALITY, AND
COMMUNICATION.
22. THE PRACTICE OF NOT-IS-NESS REDUCES UNDERSTANDING.
10.23. THE STATIC HAS THE CAPABILITY OF TOTAL KNOWINGNESS. TOTAL
KNOWINGNESS WOULD CONSIST OF TOTAL ARC.
24. TOTAL ARC WOULD BRING ABOUT THE VANISHMENT OF ALL
MECHANICAL CONDITIONS OF EXISTENCE.
25. AFFINITY IS A SCALE OF ATTITUDE WHICH FALLS AWAY FROM THE CO-EXISTENCE
OF STATIC, THROUGH THE INTERPOSITIONS OF DISTANCE
AND ENERGY, TO CREATE IDENTITY, DOWN TO CLOSE PROXIMITY BUT
MYSTERY.
By the practice of Is-ness (Beingness) and Not-is-ness (refusal to Be) individuation
progresses from the Knowingness of complete identification down through the
introduction of more and more distance and less and less duplication, through
Lookingness, Emotingness, Effortingness, Thinkingness, Symbolizingness,
Eatingness, Sexingness, and so through to not-knowingness (Mystery). Until the point
of mystery is reached) some communication is possible, but even at mystery an attempt
to communicate continues. Here we have, in the case of an individual, a gradual falling-away
from the belief that one can assume a complete Affinity down to the conviction
that all is a complete Mystery. Any individual is somewhere on this Know-to-Mystery
scale. The original Chart of Human Evaluation was the Emotion section of this scale.
26. REALITY IS THE AGREED-UPON APPARENCY OF EXISTENCE.
27. AN ACTUALITY CAN EXIST FOR ONE INDIVIDUALLY, BUT WHEN IT IS
AGREED WITH BY OTHERS IT CAN THEN BE SAID TO BE A REALITY.
The anatomy of Reality is contained in Is-ness, which is composed of As-is-ness and
Alter-is-ness. Is-ness is an apparency, it is not an Actuality. The Actuality is As-is-ness
altered so as to obtain a persistency. Unreality is the consequence and apparency of the
practice of Not-is-ness.
28. COMMUNICATION IS THE CONSIDERATION AND ACTION OF IMPELLING
AN IMPULSE OR PARTICLE FROM SOURCE-POINT ACROSS A DISTANCE TO
RECEIPT-POINT, WITH THE INTENTION OF BRINGING INTO BEING AT THE
RECEIPT-POINT A DUPLICATION OF THAT WHICH EMANATED FROM THE
SOURCE-POINT.
The formula of Communication is: Cause, Distance, Effect, with Attention and
Duplication.
The component parts of Communication are Consideration, Intention, Attention, Cause,
Source-point, Distance, Effect, Receipt-point, Duplication, the Velocity of the impulse
or particle, Nothingness or Somethingness. A non-Communication consists of
Barriers. Barriers consist of Space, Interpositions (such as walls and screens of fast-moving
particles), and Time. A communication, by definition does not need to be two-way.
When a communication is returned, the formula is repeated, with the receipt-point
now becoming a source-point and the former source-point now becoming a receipt-point.
29. IN ORDER TO CAUSE AN AS-IS-NESS TO PERSIST, ONE MUST ASSIGN
OTHER AUTHORSHIP TO THE CREATION THAN HIS OWN. OTHERWISE,
HIS VIEW OF IT WOULD CAUSE ITS VANISHMENT.
Any space, energy, form, object, individual, or physical universe condition can exist
only when an alteration has occurred of the original As-is-ness so as to prevent a casual
view from vanishing it. In other words, anything which is persisting must contain a
‘lie’ so that the original consideration is not completely duplicated.
11.30. THE GENERAL RULE OF AUDITING IS THAT ANYTHING WHICH IS
UNWANTED AND YET PERSISTS MUST BE THOROUGHLY VIEWED, AT
WHICH TIME IT WILL VANISH.
If only partially viewed, its intensity, at least, will decrease.
31. GOODNESS AND BADNESS, BEAUTIFULNESS AND UGLINESS, ARE ALIKE
CONSIDERATIONS AND HAVE NO OTHER BASIS THAN OPINION.
32. ANYTHING WHICH IS NOT DIRECTLY OBSERVED TENDS TO PERSIST.
33. ANY AS-IS-NESS WHICH IS ALTERED BY NOT-IS-NESS (BY FORCE) TENDS
TO PERSIST.
34. ANY IS-NESS, WHEN ALTERED BY FORCE, TENDS TO PERSIST.
35. THE ULTIMATE TRUTH IS A STATIC.
A Static has no mass, meaning, mobility, no wavelength, no time, no location in space,
no space. This has the technical name of ‘Basic Truth’.
36. A LIE IS A SECOND POSTULATE, STATEMENT OR CONDITION DESIGNED
TO MASK A PRIMARY POSTULATE WHICH IS PERMITTED TO REMAIN.
Examples:
Neither truth nor a lie is a motion or alteration of a particle from one position to another.
A lie is a statement that a particle having moved did not move, or a statement that a
particle, not having moved, did move. The basic lie is that a consideration which was
made was not made or that it was different.
37. WHEN A PRIMARY CONSIDERATION IS ALTERED BUT STILL EXISTS,
PERSISTENCE IS ACHIEVED FOR THE ALTERING CONSIDERATION.
All persistence depends on the Basic Truth, but the persistence is of the altering
consideration, for the Basic Truth has neither persistence nor impersistence.
38. 1: STUPIDITY IS THE UNKNOWNESS OF CONSIDERATION.
2: MECHANICAL DEFINITION: STUPIDITY IS THE UNKNOWNESS OF TIME,
PLACE, FORM, AND EVENT.
1: TRUTH IS THE EXACT CONSIDERATION.
2: TRUTH IS THE EXACT TIME, PLACE, FORM, AND EVENT.
Thus we see that failure to discover Truth brings about stupidity.
Thus we see that the discovery of Truth would bring about an As-is-ness by actual
experiment.
Thus we see that an ultimate truth would have no time, place, form or event.
Thus, then, we perceive that we can achieve a persistence only when we mask a truth.
Lying is an alteration of Time, Place, Event, or Form.
Lying becomes Alter-is-ness, becomes Stupidity.
12.(The blackness of cases is an accumulation of the case’s own or another’s lies.)
Anything which persists must avoid As-is-ness. Thus, anything, to persist, must
contain a lie.
39. LIFE POSES PROBLEMS FOR ITS OWN SOLUTION.
40. ANY PROBLEM, TO BE A PROBLEM, MUST CONTAIN A LIE. IF IT WERE
TRUTH, IT WOULD UNMOCK.
An unsolvable problem, would have the greatest persistence. It would also contain the
greatest number of altered facts. To make a problem, one must introduce Alter-is-ness.
41. THAT INTO WHICH ALTER-IS-NESS IS INTRODUCED BECOMES A
PROBLEM.
42. MEST (MATTER, ENERGY, SPACE, TIME) PERSISTS BECAUSE IT IS A
PROBLEM.
It is a problem because it contains Alter-is-ness.
43. TIME IS THE PRIMARY SOURCE OF UNTRUTH.
Time states the untruth of consecutive considerations.
44. THETA (THE STATIC) HAS NO LOCATION IN MATTER, ENERGY, SPACE, OR
TIME. IT IS CAPABLE OF CONSIDERATION.
45. THETA CAN CONSIDER ITSELF TO BE PLACED, AT WHICH MOMENT IT
BECOMES PLACED, AND TO THAT DEGREE A PROBLEM.
46. THETA CAN BECOME A PROBLEM BY ITS CONSIDERATIONS, BUT THEN
BECOMES MEST. A problem is to some degree MEST, MEST IS a problem.
47. THETA CAN RESOLVE PROBLEMS.
48. LIFE IS A GAME WHEREIN THETA AS THE STATIC SOLVES THE PROBLEMS
OF THETA AS MEST.
49. TO SOLVE ANY PROBLEM IT IS ONLY NECESSARY TO BECOME THETA,
THE SOLVER, RATHER THAN THETA, THE PROBLEM.
50. THETA AS MEST MUST CONTAIN CONSIDERATIONS WHICH ARE LIES.
The above is a summary of states of being which can be used to create, cause to persist,
or destroy.
HAVING AGREED TO THE MECHANICS AND RETAINING THE AGREEMENTS, THE
THETAN CAN YET MAKE INNUMERABLE POSTULATES WHICH BY THEIR
CONTRADICTION AND COMPLEXITY, CREATE, CAUSE TO PERSIST, AND
DESTROY HUMAN BEHAVIOR.
13.INTENSIVE PROCEDURE: OUTLINE
FOR ALL CASES WHO HAVE ANY PSYCHO-SOMATIC ILLS, OR WHO ARE
NEUROTIC OR PSYCHOTIC USE ONLY R2-16 ANYWHERE FROM TEN TO A
HUNDRED HOURS, OR UNTIL THE PERSON IS NO LONGER ILL, NEUROTIC, OR
PSYCHOTIC.
In the use of this procedure, only two types of case are considered, and the procedure is
adapted to these two types. The sole criteria of the case is whether or not it can be exteriorized.
This is promptly established by the use of ARC Straight-wire. When there is no noticeable
communication lag, then Route 1 is employed in this procedure. When there is any noticeable
communication lag, Route 2 is employed.
All sessions begin with the first three identical steps. Then, if he has established that
there is no noticeable communication lag with ARC Straightwire (the third step), the auditor
proceeds on Route 1. However, if a noticeable communication lag exists when using ARC
Straightwire, the auditor -- having flattened this lag for the moment -- proceeds on Route 2.
The amount of occlusion on the case is not the test.
1. Get into two-way communication with the preclear.
2. Discuss the present time problem, if any.
3. Get the preclear into session with ARC Straightwire.
14.ROUTE 1
R1-4: BE THREE FEET BACK OF YOUR HEAD
R1-5: WHATEVER THE PRECLEAR HAPPENS TO BE LOOKING AT (DO NOT
DIRECT HIS ATTENTION TO ANYTHING) HAVE HIM COPY IT ONE AT A
TIME, MANY, MANY TIMES. THEN HAVE, HIM LOCATE A
NOTHINGNESS AND COPY IT MANY, MANY TIMES
R1-6: HAVE PRECLEAR HOLD THE TWO UPPER BACK ANCHOR POINTS OF
THE ROOM FOR AT LEAST TWO MINUTES BY THE CLOCK
R1-7: HAVE PRECLEAR LET GO AND FIND MANY PLACES WHERE HE IS NOT.
(REPEAT THE COPYING: BACK ANCHOR POINTS AND WHERE HE
IS NOT, ONE AFTER THE OTHER, MANY TIMES)
R1-8: HAVE PRECLEAR DISCOVER MANY THINGS, ONE AFTER ANOTHER,
WHICH HE CONSIDERS SAFE TO LOOK AT
R1-9: GRAND TOUR
R1-10: HAVE PRECLEAR DISCOVER THINGS HE WOULDN’T MIND OCCUPYING
THE SAME SPACE WITH HIM
R1-11: HAVE PRECLEAR BE PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS IN HAVINGNESS
R1-12: HAVE PRECLEAR MOCK UP GENERATORS, POWER PLANTS AND SUNS
TO GIVE HIM ENERGY, ON THAT GRADIENT SCALE, UNTIL HE IS
TOTALLY CONVINCED THAT HE DOES NOT HAVE TO RECEIVE ENERGY
FROM AN OUTSIDE SOURCE. (A COMPLETE REMEDY OF HAVINGNESS)
R1-13: HAVE PRECLEAR ADJUST GENETIC ENTITY ANCHOR POINTS
R1-14: HAVE PRECLEAR CREATE AND DESTROY VARIOUS KINDS OF THETAN
MACHINES
R1-15: REPAIR PRECLEAR’S ABILITY TO COMMUNICATE BY HAVING HIM
COPY MANY SCENES IN THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE
NOW HAVE PRECLEAR RUN EACH AND EVERY ROUTE 2 STEP UNTIL THE
AUDITOR IS CONVINCED THAT HE CAN DO THESE EASILY AND ABLY.
15.ROUTE 2
If the preclear had any appreciable communication lag as established in the third step
above, all ROUTE 1 steps are omitted, and the case is entered into ROUTE 2, the first step of
which is ROUTE 2-16.
R2-16: RUN PRECLEAR THROUGH OPENING PROCEDURE OF 8-C PARTS (A),
(B), (C), EACH ONE UNTIL THE PHYSICAL COMMUNICATION LAG
STABILIZES. THE AUDITOR SHOULD MAKE SURE AT FIRST WHILE
RUNNING STEP (A) THAT THE SPOTS HE DESIGNATES ARE HIGHLY
GENERALIZED AND ARE NOT SMALL AREAS UNTIL, THE PRECLEAR
CAN BE DIRECTED TO SMALL AND PRECISE SPOTS
R2-17: OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION UNTIL PRECLEAR FEELS
GOOD ABOUT IT
R2-18: HAVE PRECLEAR SPOT SPOTS IN SPACE UNTIL HE CAN DO IT EASILY,
MEANWHILE REMEDYING HIS HAVINGNESS
R2-19: HAVE PRECLEAR SPOT SPOTS IN ROOM AND MOVE BODY INTO THEM
AND MOVE BODY OUT INTO NEW SPOTS
R2-20: USE OF PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
R2-21: GRANTING OF BEINGNESS
R2-22: SPANNING ATTENTION
R2-23: ATTENTION BY DUPLICATION
R2-24: EXTERIORIZATION BY DISTANCE, EXTROVERTED AND INTROVERTED
ALTERNATELY
R2-25: VIEWPOINT AND VIEWPOINT ARC STRAIGHTWIRE
R2-26: REMEDY OF LAUGHTER
R2-27: RESOLVE DANGEROUSNESS OF ENVIRONMENT
R2-28: NOTHING-SOMETHING
R2-29: TIME TOLERANCE
R2-30: POSITION BY SECURITY (SOP 8-D)
R2-31: BEINGNESS PROCESSING
R2-32: ASSIGNMENT OF ATTRIBUTES
R2-33: PERFECT DUPLICATION
R2-34: DESCRIPTION PROCESSING
R2-35: LOCATION PROCESSES
R2-36: SELF DETERMINISM
16.R2-37: YELLING
R2-38: HOLDING ANCHOR POINTS
R2-39: CONCEIVING SOMETHING INTERESTING
R2-40: CONCEIVING A STATIC
R2-41: VIA
R2-42: PAN-DETERMINISM
R2-43: FIGHTING
R2-44: MUST AND MUST NOT HAPPEN
R2-45:
R2-46: OTHER PEOPLE
R2-47: BODY DIFFERENTIATION
R2-48: SEPARATENESS
R2-49: DEI SCALE
R2-50: CHANGING MINDS
R2-51: RISING SCALE PROCESSING
R2-52: UNKNOWNS
R2-53: REPAIR
R2-54: FLOWS
R2-55: IMPORTANCE
R2-56: GAMES PROCESSING
R2-57: PROCESSES
R2-58: LOSS
R2-59: SURVIVAL
R2-60: THE HIDDEN COMMUNICATION
R2-61: GOOD AND EVIL
R2-62: OVERT ACTS AND MOTIVATORS
R2-63: ACCEPT - REJECT
R2-64: TOUCHING
R2-65: ALTERATION
17.R2-66: ELECTING CAUSE
R2-67: OBJECTS
R2-68: INCOMPREHENSIBILITY
R2-69: PLEASE PASS THE OBJECT
R2-70: EXPECTANCE LEVEL
R2-71: ANSWERS
R2-72: SECURITY PROCESSING
R2-73: MAKING SOMETHING FOR THE FUTURE
R2-74: PROCESSING
R2-75: KNOWINGNESS
NOW TAKE A ROUTE 2 PRECLEAR THROUGH ROUTE 1
Follow the Auditor’s Code.
‘The procedure which turns on a condition will turn it off.’ Run a procedure as long as
it produces communication changes (perception, changes in altering communication lag).
There has been found by long practice that the only things which spin a preclear are: (1)
too many auditors; (2) not enough food, and (3) processing between 10:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m.
When in doubt, remedy havingness.
When choosing between two procedures, use the simpler one.
18.CHART OF PROCESSES
WHERE THEY ARE ON THE ARC TONE SCALE
Exteriorized
Spotting Spots in Space 4.0
3.6
Remedy of Havingness 3.5
3.1
O.P. by Duplication 3.0
2.6
Opening Procedure 8-C 1.8
2.5
Elementary Straightwire 1.8
1.1
Two-way Communication 1.0
-8.0
19.AUDITING COMMANDS FOR INTENSIVE PROCEDURE
I. GET INTO TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION WITH THE PRECLEAR
Communication is the consideration and action of impelling an impulse or particle from
source point across a distance to receipt point with the intention of bringing into being at the
receipt point a duplication of that which emanated from the source point. The formula of
communication is CAUSE DISTANCE - EFFECT with attention and duplication. The
component parts of communication are consideration, intention, attention, cause, source point,
distance, effect, receipt point, duplication, the velocity of the impulse or particle, nothingness
or somethingness. A non-communication consists of barriers. Barriers consist of space,
interpositions (such as walls and screens of fast moving particles) and time. A communication,
by definition, does not need to be two-way. When a communication is returned, the formula is
repeated with the receipt point now becoming a source point and the former source point now
becoming a receipt point. One can be comfortable in communicating only when one is willing
to be cause and is willing to be an effect. As the distance factor in communication lessens, or as
mass increases in the particle, one views the condensing manifestation of the Know to Sex
Scale and a deterioration of the reality factor of the ARC triangle. To improve communication
one must lessen mass, increase velocity, and increase the distance factor, improve the quality of
duplication, remedy attention, and bring about a willingness on the part of cause to be an effect
and on the part of effect to be cause. To reach toward a theoretical perfection in communication,
one should be willing to tolerate in any form any of the component parts of communication
itself with the understanding that these include affinity and reality. Any sensory perceptic can
be utilized in communication in establishing two-way communication.
Communication lag is the interval of time intervening between a posed question and the
actual and precise answer to that question. Communication lag is a manifestation of two-way
communication. Whether the interval is filled with speech or silence, the definition of
communication lag still holds true. An auditor must go by the rule that all questions posed must
receive answers, and therefore must be careful that he poses questions which can be answered
by a person in the condition of the preclear.
This is the most important step of any auditing session, and its achievement by any
perception with affinity and reality is a specific goal of the auditor. If a preclear for any reason
drags under processing it is because the auditor was not sure that the preclear was in
communication with anything and was not in Communication, actually, with the things to
which the auditor directed his attention.
II. DISCUSS THE PRESENT TIME PROBLEM, IF ANY
Discussion of the present time problem is necessary each session so as to discover
whether or not the preclear has had a disturbance between sessions which has so fixed his
attention that he is unable to give his complete presence to auditing.
I I I . G E T T H E P R E C L E A R I N T O S E S S I O N W I T H A R C
STRAIGHTWIRE
ARC Straightwire is used to determine the communication lag of the preclear. The steps
of ARC Straightwire are ‘Can you remember a time which seems real to you?’ ‘Can you
remember a time when you were in communication with someone?’ ‘Can you remember a time
when someone was in communication with you?’ ‘Can you remember a time when someone
agreed with you?’ ‘Can you remember a time when you agreed with someone?’ ‘Can you
remember a time when someone liked you?’ ‘Can you remember a time when you liked
someone?’
20.In actual practice, to establish the communication lag it is only necessary to use the first
question: ‘Can you remember a time which seems real to you?’ to establish the lag, and then
use this question enough more times to bring the communication lag to a constancy before
proceeding on with further steps.
21.ROUTE 1
R1-4: BE THREE FEET BACK OF YOUR HEAD
The command ‘Be three feet back of your head’ should be given casually, and if
immediately obeyed the auditor with no further discussion should then go on to R1-5. If there
is any argument after this command is given, or if the preclear cannot quite understand what is
occurring and does not do so, then it is indicated that the auditor switch routes and without
further argument on the subject of exteriorization continue the session with R2-16.
NOTE: A thetan located in a space is less than theta itself, but a thetan located is greater
than homo sapiens.
R1-5: WHATEVER THE PRECLEAR HAPPENS TO BE LOOKING AT (DO
NOT DIRECT HIS ATTENTION TO ANYTHING) HAVE HIM COPY IT ONE
AT A TIME, MANY MANY TIMES. THEN HAVE HIM LOCATE A
NOTHINGNESS AND COPY IT MANY MANY TIMES
Without directing the preclear’s attention to anything, ask him what he is looking at and
then have him mock up a copy of whatever he sees, whether it is the room) a picture, or
blackness. Have him then make another copy of what he saw) and another one, and another
one, and another one, and another one. These copies are all the same as the original sight which
he perceived when asked what he was looking at. Acquaint the preclear with the word ‘copy’
by first asking him to ‘make another one just like it’ and then for this phrase substitute the word
‘copy’. When the preclear has made some two dozen copies, have him do something,
anything, with these copies so as to dispose of them. They can be used to supplement
havingness, in which case he would be asked to push them all together and pull them in upon
himself. In any event, do not leave him with these copies. When the copies are disposed of,
have the preclear locate a nothingness by saying, ‘Can you find a nothingness somewhere
around you?’ And then have him copy it by saying, ‘Now make another one just like it.’ ‘Make
another one just like it.’ ‘Now copy that first nothingness again’, and so forth until he has
copied this a couple of dozen times. Then have him dispose of these nothingnesses.
R1-6: HAVE PRECLEAR HOLD THE TWO UPPER BACK ANCHOR POINTS
OF THE ROOM FOR AT LEAST TWO MINUTES BY THE CLOCK
‘Locate the two upper back corners of the room (those behind the preclear’s body) hold
on to them and don’t think.’ Do this for at least two minutes. The preclear could be alternately
asked to find two nothingnesses and hold on to them for two minutes without thinking. The
length of time is not mentioned to the preclear. When this has been done, do not neglect to tell
the preclear to let go. Do not run the next step with him still holding on to the two back corners
of the room.
R1-7: HAVE PRECLEAR LET GO AND FIND MANY PLACES WHERE HE IS
NOT. (REPEAT THE COPYING: BACK ANCHOR POINTS AND WHERE HE
IS NOT, ONE AFTER THE OTHER MANY TIMES.)
‘Now find a place where you are not.’ Repeat this command many times until any
communication lag developed by the question has been rendered constant.
R1-8: HAVE PRECLEAR DISCOVER MANY THINGS ONE AFTER
ANOTHER, WHICH HE CONSIDERS SAFE TO LOOK AT.
22.This step is the basic theory behind Viewpoint Straightwire. Its intention is to render the
preclear comfortable while looking at anything. The keynote here is to use the goal of
Viewpoint Straightwire directly. One is interested in having him look at actual things in the
MEST universe from Look down to Sex on the Know to Sex Scale. One should include, in
particular, turbulent masses and mysteries. The most important part of this process, and the one
which should be stressed while others are neglected, is to get the preclear to actually look at
actual things, then to have him look at actual emotions, and finally to make very certain that he
can be very comfortable in looking at all manner of efforts. To do this one sends the preclear as
a thetan out into the world and has him actually find things which it is comfortable for him to
look at in the bands of plain lookingness, then emotion, then effort. One starts with the
command, ‘What would it be all right for you to look at here in this room?’ This is done with
the body’s eyes closed. The preclear is made to give as many things in the room which it would
be all right for him to look at as is necessary to bring to constant any communication lag
involved. Run the command, ‘Now find something it is safe to look at outside this room.’
When it is ascertained that, in this exercise of discovering things which are all right for him to
look at, the preclear is wandering rather far afield with some confidence the auditor should tell
him, ‘Now go and find some emotional states which it would be all right for you to look at.’
The preclear actually goes around to various parts of the world and sees people and animals in
various states of emotion until he discovers he can be completely comfortable in viewing all the
emotions on the tone scale in action -- apathy, grief, fear, resentment, anger, antagonism,
boredom, enthusiasm, and serenity. When this has been accomplished, have the preclear find
some efforts being engaged in by something, anywhere, which it would be comfortable for the
preclear to view. It may take some little time to discover something in the line of effort which
he can really comfortably perceive. He finds various efforts which he can view and the process
should be continued until he can look very comfortably upon wild and turbulent motion. The
keynote of this process is to get the preclear completely certain that he can view anything in the
universe with aplomb, particularly emotion and effort.
The process can be continued, if with less benefit, with the remainder of the Know to
Sex Scale plus Mystery -- Know, Look, Emote, Effort, Think, Symbols, Eat, Sex, Mystery. If
in doubt, the auditor should run the entire band from Know to Sex including Mystery. It
should be clearly understood hy the auditor that the preclear does not simply think about these
things or mock them up and view them. The auditor wants the preclear, exteriorized, to go
around various places in the actual physical universe and look at things and so build his
tolerance on the physical universe. It is important that it may be necessary to remedy the
preclear’s havingness at intervals while this step is in progress.
R1-9: GRAND TOUR
The commands of the Grand Tour are as follows: ‘Be near Earth’, ‘Be near the Moon’,
‘Be near the Sun’, ‘Be near the Earth’, ‘Be near the Moon’, ‘Be near the Sun’, ‘Earth’,
‘Moon’, ‘Sun’, giving the last three commands many times. Each time the auditor must wait
until the preclear signifies that he has completed the command. The preclear is supposed to
move near these bodies or simply be near them, it does not matter which. The Grand Tour
continues with ‘Now find a rock’, ‘Be inside of it’, ‘Be outside of it’, ‘Inside’, ‘Outside’,
‘Inside’, ‘Outside’, ‘Be in the center of the Earth’, ‘Be outside of Earth’, ‘Inside’, ‘Outside’,
and back and forth until the preclear is able to do this very rapidly. Then the Grand Tour
continues, ‘Be near Mars’, ‘Be at the center of Mars’, ‘Outside of Mars’, ‘Center’, ‘Outside’,
‘Now more down slowly toward the surface’. The preclear will probably question this, for he
has run into a force screen, or thinks he has. ‘All right then, be on the surface of Mars’, ‘Be
above Mars’, ‘Be on the surface’, ‘Be above Mars’, ‘Move down to the surface of Mars’. He
is shifted into various positions in the vicinity of Mars until he is entirely used to that planet.
When the preclear is entirely comfortable in the solar system by reason of running the Grand
Tour, do Change of Space with him, first on all the locations where he has received auditing,
therapy or treatment of any kind here on Earth. Next do all the key locations mentioned in
‘What to Audit’ (History of Man) such as the entrance point of the MEST universe, the place
where he made his first facsimile, etc. This is run in this fashion: ‘Be at the place where you
23.entered the MEST universe’, ‘Be at the center of this room’, ‘Center of this room’, ‘Entrance
point’, ‘Room’ and so forth until the entrance point is in present time. The preclear should be
made to run change of space on any area until that area is in present time. Originally it could be
conceived that only the place where the preclear is is in present time, that all other places are in
past time to the degree that they are far from the preclear. The object is to get all areas into
present time. Caution: Change of Space is never run with the command, ‘Be here’, ‘Be there’.
For when the preclear is ‘there’ it has become ‘here’ to him. Thus the actual designation in brief
should be given each time.
IMPORTANT: WHILE RUNNING CHANGE OF SPACE OR ANY PART OF THE
GRAND TOUR IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO REMEDY THE HAVINGNESS OF THE
PRECLEAR. THIS IS DONE WITH THE COMMAND:
‘Put up eight anchor points as though they were the corners of a cube around you’,
‘Now pull them in on you.’ ‘Put up eight more.’ ‘Pull them in on you.’ Any dopiness or
increasing sadness on the part of the preclear or a feeling of degradation comes about from lack
of havingness. In the Grand Tour it is more important for the preclear to locate and occupy
exact locations in space and in objects than it is for him to examine the surrounding area.
R1-10: HAVE PRECLEAR DISCOVER THINGS HE WOULDN’T MIND
OCCUPYING THE SAME SPACE WITH HIM
Agreement with the physical universe brings about the consideration on the part of the
preclear that two things cannot occupy the same space. It is this basic rule which keeps the
physical universe ‘stretched’. It is not, however, true that two things cannot occupy the same
space, and it is particularly untrue when the two things are an object and a thetan, since a thetan
can occupy the space any object is occupying. The process is run with the question. ‘Now tell
me something you wouldn’t mind having occupy the same space you are in’ or ‘Give me
something you wouldn’t mind having occupy your space’. The auditor must ascertain in any
answer the preclear gives whether or not the preclear is absolutely certain he wouldn’t object to
this mutual occupation of the same space. The preclear is made to get item after item until he
recognizes a high reality on it and then is made to occupy the same space as many things (this is
comparable to the STEP 1 processes of earlier SOP’s where the preclear was made to be in
many things). When it has been clearly established that the preclear, with absolute certainty, is
perfectly able to tolerate anything occupying his same space, the auditor goes on to the next
step.
R1-11: HAVE PRECLEAR BE PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS IN
HAVINGNESS
Ask the preclear. ‘What kind of a problem can you be in havingness?’ ‘What kind of a
problem can you be in not havingness?’ many times until he has isolated many problems for
many people. ‘What kind of a problem can others be to you in havingness?’ ‘What kind of a
problem can others be to you in not havingness?’ After this has been well worked over,
advance into solutions with: ‘What kind of a solution can you be to havingness?’ ‘What kind of
a solution can you be to not havingness?’ and so forth. It may be necessary to explain what is
meant by havingness, but it has been my experience this has not been so.
R1-12: HAVE PRECLEAR MOCK-UP GENERATORS, POWER PLANTS AND
SUNS TO GIVE HIM ENERGY, ON THAT GRADIENT SCALE, UNTIL HE
IS TOTALLY CONVINCED THAT HE DOES NOT HAVE TO RECEIVE
ENERGY FROM AN OUTSIDE SOURCE. (A COMPLETE REMEDY OF
HAVINGNESS)
24.Having run R1-10 and R1-11, the preclear should be able to get good mock-ups. The
main object of this step, however it is done, is to get the preclear to recognize that he himself
creates the energy which he uses. One of the methods of doing this is having him mock-up
generators of various sizes on a gradient scale, then larger generators, then power plants,
lightning bolts, and finally suns to give him energy. At this step a complete remedy of
havingness should be accomplished. If it is not adequately accomplished with this step, the
auditor should return to R1-10, do that and R1-11, and then repeat R1-12.
R1-13: HAVE PRECLEAR ADJUST GENETIC ENTITY ANCHOR POINTS
Early in processing never direct the preclear’s attention to his body. If he happens to be
looking at his body, this is all right. But do not tell him to look at his body. To begin R1-13,
have preclear duplicate his body many, many times and push the mock-up into it. Have him
pretend that, by mock-ups, he is exteriorizing from various other kinds of bodies. Have him
interiorize and exteriorize many times from his present body. Then have him mock-up the
electronic structure of his body until he can see it easily. Now ask him ‘Do you see any gold
balls in your head?’ If he does not, have him mock-up gold balls until his head’s golden balls
appear. Now have him move any golden balls he finds which are out of position in his head
until they are in the proper position. When an anchor point (golden ball) will not move back
into position, have the preclear mock-up many anchor points in that area -- which is to say,
remedy the body’s havingness in that area. Then, and only then, will it be found that the anchor
point of the body itself will go back into that position. Caution: Never let the preclear mock-up
an anchor point of his own and put it into position in the body the GE can tolerate only its own
anchor points. Ask the preclear, ‘Can you find any more of these golden balls which are out of
position?’ and have him move them back into position or assemble them or remedy them until
all the anchor points of the body are in excellent condition and in the proper position.
R1-14: HAVE PRECLEAR CREATE AND DESTROY VARIOUS KINDS OF
THETAN MACHINES
A thetan is always equipped with various kinds of machinery. Remedying of
havingness should make it very easy for him to dispense with or create new machinery. He has
machines which send him places, machines which hide things, and machines which ‘zap’ him.
There are two types of machines those that mock things up, and those which unmock things.
But there can be a great variety of considerations in this machinery. Machines are actually
machines. He makes them up of tubes and other electronic equipment. Sometimes they look
like huge teletypewriters. Simply duplicating a machine many times will at last reduce it to
nothingness. A thetan whose havingness has been remedied has relatively little difficulty with
machinery as he is not keeping it around to supply him with energy. He has set up machinery
which will ‘zap’ him when he gets into certain positions. This, in life as a homo sapien, is
manifested by fear of self-invalidation. It comes from the machine since invalidation, on the
upper echelon, is by force. Have him make machinery which actually works. Make the
machinery work, and destroy the machinery, until he is totally confident of his ability to make
and destroy any and all types of machines. It is important that the machinery he mocks up
actually works. The process of making a machine is to make a postulate, fit it into a machine,
hide the machine, and forget it. The machine is keyed against something the thetan may think.
When the thetan thinks something, the machine goes into action. Be very wary of destroying all
of a thetan’s machinery. Be also very wary of leaving a thetan with no mass as he feels very
unhappy about being only a thought.
R1-15: REPAIR PRECLEAR’S ABILITY TO COMMUNICATE BY HAVING
HIM COPY MANY SCENES IN THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE
This step is actually the same step as R1-5, but it is run on a wider basis. The thetan is
sent around to various parts of the world and the universe and asked to copy things. He copies
25.each one many times until he is satisfied that his copy is exact in all respects with the original in
the physical universe. When the thetan has accomplished this he will be able to make things
with adequate density and mass.
NOW HAVE PRECLEAR RUN EACH AND EVERY ROUTE 2 STEP UNTIL THE
AUDITOR IS CONVINCED THAT HE CAN DO THESE EASILY AND ABLY
26.ROUTE 2
If the preclear had any appreciable communication lag as established in the III step
(ARC Straightwire) above, all Rl steps are omitted, and the case is entered into ROUTE 2, the
first step of which is R2-16.
R2-16: RUN PRECLEAR THROUGH OPENING PROCEDURE OF 8-C
P A R T S (A ), (B ), (C ), E A C H O N E U N T I L T H E P H Y S I C A L
COMMUNICATION LAG STABILIZES. THE AUDITOR SHOULD MAKE
SURE AT FIRST WHILE RUNNING STEP (A) THAT THE SPOTS HE
DESIGNATES ARE HIGHLY GENERALIZED AND ARE NOT SMALL
AREAS UNTIL THE PRECLEAR CAN BE DIRECTED TO SMALL AND
PRECISE SPOTS
The entire modus operandi of Opening Procedure of 8-C consists in having the preclear
move his body around the room under the auditor’s direction until (A) he finds he is in actual
communication with many spots on the surface of things in the room, (B) until he can select
spots in the room and know that he is selecting them and can communicate with them, and (C)
select spots and move to them, decide when to touch them and when to let go. Each one of
these steps is done until the auditor is well assured that the preclear has no communication lag.
The auditing commands are as follows: ‘Do you see that chair?’ ‘Go over to it and put
your hand on it’, ‘Now look at that lamp’, ‘Now walk over to it an put your hand on it. This is
done with various objects without specifically designating spots of a more precise nature than
an object until the preclear is very certain that he is in good communication with these objects
and the walls and other parts of the room. The auditor can say anything he pleases, or
seemingly introduce any significance he wishes to so long as he hews very closely to the actual
thing in this method which makes it work -- which is to say, perceiving the physical universe
and making contact with it. Part (A) has been enlarged by the auditor’s selecting exact spots.
‘Do you see that black mark on the left arm of that chair?’ ‘All right, go over to it and put your
finger on it’, ‘Now take your finger off it’, ‘Do you see the lower bolt on that light switch?’
‘All right, go over to it and put your finger on it’, ‘Take your finger off it’. And so forth until
the preclear has a UNIFORM PERCEPTION of any and all objects in the room including the
walls, the floor and the ceiling. This step can be kept up for a long time. It has an infinity of
variations. But it is not the variations which work, it is the making and breaking of
communication with the actual designated spots.
IF AT ANY TIME THERE IS ANY DOUBT ABOUT THE PRECLEAR’S CASE DO
THIS STEP, PART (A), UNTIL SATISFIED THAT COMMUNICATION IS GOOD. A
CASE WHICH WILL NOT OBEY OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C (A) ORDERS WILL
ALWAYS PERVERT OR ALTER COMMANDS TO BE PERFORMED WITH LESS
SUPERVISION THAN PERCEPTION OF HIS BODY.
Part (B) has these auditing commands, ‘Find a spot in this room’. No further
designation is necessary for this spot. Spotting procedure gives the preclear determinism of
selection. When the preclear has done so the auditor says, ‘Go over to it and put your finger on
it’. When the preclear has done this the auditor says, ‘Now let go of it’. It must be emphasized
that the preclear is not to act upon a command until the command is given and must not let go
until told to let go. The preclear is permitted to select spots until such time as all communication
lag is flat and until he is freely selecting spots on the walls, objects, chairs, etc. with no
specialization whatsoever -which means that his perception of the room has become uniform.
Many things turn up in running this procedure such as the fact that the preclear cannot look at
walls, etc.
Part (C) of this procedure is run with these auditing commands, ‘Find a spot in the
room’, ‘Make up your mind when you are going to touch it and then touch it’, ‘Make up your
mind when you are going to let go of it, and let go’. A variation of this process is to have the
27.preclear make up his mind about a spot and then have him change his mind and select another
spot.
The trouble with most cases, and the trouble with any case which is hung up and is not
progressing, is that an insufficient quantity of Opening Procedure 8-C has been used by the
auditor. This has been found to be an invariable rule. Preclears will pretend to run commands
of a subjective nature but not run them at all. In other words, the auditor is saying do one thing
and the preclear is doing quite another. Thus the process is not actually being used on the
preclear. The difficulty in this case is a specific difficulty in communication where the preclear
cannot duplicate. But more important than that, any preclear whose case is hanging up is out of
touch with reality and the environment to such an extent that he has begun to do processes on
mock-ups rather than on the actual physical universe. It will be discovered that doing processes
on mock-ups such as finding spots in them, finding distances to them, and so forth is
productive of no gain, and even negative gain. Only processes which directly address the
physical universe are found to raise the tone of the preclear. He has to come up to full tolerance
of it before he can get out of it. Thus any case bogging down somewhere in more intricate
procedures can be relieved and brought into present time by 8-C. The only caution on the part
of the auditor is that he must be very precise about giving his orders and must insist on the
preclear being very certain that he is actually seeing spots and touching them and inhibiting the
preclear from executing the commands before they are given.
R2-17: OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION UNTIL PRECLEAR
FEELS GOOD ABOUT IT
Opening Procedure by Duplication is begun only after the preclear has some reality on
his environment. Until the preclear’s reality on his environment is good, Opening Procedure by
Duplication should not be done, for the preclear only turns on an unreality circuit and goes
through it mechanically. The first part of Opening Procedure by Duplication is to get the
preclear to examine, communicate with and own (somewhat on the order of Opening Procedure
of 8-C) two dissimilar objects. These objects are then placed several feet apart and at a level so
that the preclear can pick them up without bending over, but so that he has to walk between
them. Once the auditor is entirely satisfied that the preclear has reality on these objects and can
own them he then begins Opening Procedure by Duplication with the following commands,
supposing that one of the objects was a book and the other was an ash tray, ‘Go over to the
book’, ‘Look at it’, ‘Pick it up’, ‘What is its color?’ At this point the preclear must give an
answer. ‘What is its temperature?’, here the preclear must answer again. ‘Put it down in exactly
the same place.’ When the preclear has executed, ‘Go over to the ash tray’, ‘Look at it’, ‘Pick it
up’, ‘What is its color?’ the preclear says his answer. ‘What is its temperature?’, the preclear
says his answer. ‘Put it down exactly in the same place.’ When the preclear has executed, ‘Go
over to the book’ and the same words and the same formula are used over and over again until
the preclear has had a sufficient number of hours of Opening Procedure by Duplication to
enable him to do it without communication lag, without protest, without apathy, but only
cheerfulness, each time seeing the items newly. This is a process which is done by the hour.
The process is better when done consecutively for so many hours rather than done an hour
apiece each day for several days. This procedure is the first step of Procedure 30.
R2-18: HAVE PRECLEAR SPOT SPOTS IN SPACE UNTIL HE CAN DO IT
EASILY, MEANWHILE REMEDYING HIS HAVINGNESS
As briefly as spotting spots in space and remedying havingness can be stated, this is
one of the key processes of Scientology and has an infinity of variations. It is actually two
processes stemming from one. While the preclear is still interiorized, spotting spots and
remedying havingness is done by the preclear remaining where he is and simply indicating by
pointing where the spot is which he is designating. When it is done with the preclear
exteriorized, it becomes Change of Space. This process has an infinity of uses and is one of the
best processes in rendering an assist. Here in Intensive Procedure we use it in its simplest
28.form. The auditor says, ‘Spot a spot in the space of this room’. The preclear does so. The
auditor ascertains whether or not the spot has color, mass, or if it is simply a location in space.
A spot should be simply a location in space, it should not have color or mass. The preclear is
asked to located several such spots in the room. It is important that he walk over to them and
that he put his finger on them. After he has done this for a very short time it will be discovered
that his havingness has decrease markedly. The auditor has him mock up something which is
acceptable to him and has him pull it in on his body until any queasiness or physical upset is
remedied. As soon as this is accomplished, the auditor has him spot more spots in the space of
the room.
R2-19: HAVE PRECLEAR SPOT SPOTS IN ROOM AND MOVE BODY INTO
THEM AND MOVE BODY OUT INTO NEW SPOTS
Only when the preclear can do R2-18 comfortably and actually locate locations
independent of the objects in the room itself does the auditor go on to the next phase of this
process which is, ‘Locate a spot in the room which you can then move into your body’. When
the preclear has done so the auditor says, ‘Move your body over the spot’. When the preclear
has done this, ‘Move your body off that spot’. It will he discovered that the preclear may find
that the spot moves along with his body. One simply wants the location in space, and this, of
course, does not move. Only the body moves. This is done many times until the preclear is
adept at moving his body over these spots and moving his body off of them. It is understood,
of course, that the location simply moves on into the body as the body is moved over it and that
the location moves out of the body as the body is moved away from it. In other words, the
location is stable, the body is moving. This is done until the preclear is absolutely sure that it is
he who is moving his body over such spots. It may be necessary to remedy havingness while
this step is being done. The third part of this step is done as follows, ‘Spot a spot in the space
of this room’, ‘Now move your body around it’, ‘Fix your body in that position’, ‘Now
change your mind about staying there’. (And without the preclear moving off the spot, ‘Pick
out a new spot’, ‘Now move your body around the new spot’. This process has many
variations. One can have a preclear move a chronic somatic around such spots, fix it there and
unfix it. One can have a preclear find a spot and then appear there and then disappear there, find
a new spot and appear there and disappear there. The main thing is to have the preclear spot
spots and move his body around them and then move his body off the spot.
R2-20: USE OF PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS
The use of Problems and Solutions is the second step for Procedure 30 and includes the
steps already given in R1-11. [These steps come after the steps as given below.] The auditor
asks the preclear, ‘What kind of a problem could you be to your mother?’ And when the
preclear has found one, ‘All right, can you be that problem?’ And when the preclear has
become it, ‘Can you see your mother figuring about it?’ And whether the preclear can or not,
‘Give me another problem you could be to your mother’, ‘Can you be that problem?’ etc., until
the communication lag is flattened. Then one asks the same question about father and about
other people in the preclear’s life, asking the preclear each time for the problem then asking him
to be the problem and then asking if it makes other people worry and think about it. Finally
one asks, ‘Now what kind of a problem can you be to ... (preclear’s name)?’ And when this
has finally been flattened to a communication lag constant, one can assume that he has more or
less handled this situation for the moment and he uses exactly the same process on solutions.
The same wording as above is used with the exception that ‘solution’ is substituted for
‘problem’. When the preclear cannot be a problem, the auditor should find some things that the
preclear can be with great certainty, have the preclear be those things, then have the preclear be
a problem. When processing an auditor, have him be an auditor and a preclear alternately,
physically assuming the proper position for each until all auditing has been run out and the
preclear is no longer waiting to find out what is going to happen. The auditor should keep in
mind the fact that a preclear can be a ‘no-solution’ also that the preclear can be a ‘no-problem’
also that the preclear can be a solution that needs problems. Many various and strange
29.manifestations take place, but this process very severely uses only the above commands. The
process can be continued, and should be, into the commands of R1-11 which take up problems
in havingness.
It may occur if the preclear is a mystic or is interested in the occult, that he offers a
peculiar problem in problems. Such a preclear may be looking for the solution to all problems,
assuming that only one solution is possible for all problems. If he were to discover this
solution, he would, of course, find himself completely out of problems. Thus his havingness
in terms of problems would be so enormously reduced that he would discover himself without
any interest of any kind. But even if the preclear is not in this category, the process which is
given in this paragraph is definitely indicated in the field of problems. Actually it is a
combination of running significances and handling problems, and it is useful for any state of
case except, of course, those upon whom only Opening Procedure of 8-C may be run. The
complete remedy of problems, of course, takes place when the preclear is convinced that he can
create problems at will. Until he is so convinced, he is going to hold on to old problems. The
way to Convince him that he can create problems is to have him pick out, or pick up, an object.
Have him examine this object until he is sure it is real. Then ask him the question: ‘What
problems could this object be to you?’ Have him begin to name off various problems. It will be
discovered at first, as always in the handling of significances, that he begins to drain the object
itself of the problems which are inherent in the object, and then will eventually begin to invent
problems. The problem should be run until the preclear is convinced that he can create
problems at will. Many objects can be used rather than just one if it is discovered that the
preclear’s attention is fixing too strongly upon the object.
R2-21: GRANTING OF BEINGNESS
Granting of Beingness (life) to something. The preclear is as well as he can grant life to
things, an action which involves the creation of energy. The basic granting of beingness is the
thetan duplicating himself as another thinking being. In the mechanics of the granting of
beingness we have ‘orientation point’ and the ‘symbol’. An orientation point is that point in
relation to which others have location. It is also that point from which the space containing the
locations is being created. In the orientation point we have our basic definition of space: ‘Space
is a viewpoint of dimension’. Dependent upon the orientation for its location and to some
degree for its life is the ‘symbol’. A symbol is an object which has mass, meaning and
mobility. A symbol locates itself, if it does so at all, by the orientation point. It regards the
orientation point as a continual source point and itself as a continual effect point of that source
point. So long as one can create life, he more or less considers himself an orientation point.
And as soons he is convinced he cannot create life in any degree, he becomes to that degree a
symbol. The granting of beingness is a complexity of the communication formula in that we
have broadly added space rather than linear distance and have introduced the idea of a
continuing orientation point and a continuing symbol. The velocity of the communication
formula is expanded to continuing velocities. And we have entered directly from the
communication formula into our first understanding of Time and therefore Survival. Its the
symbol which is surviving in minute gradients of time and the orientation point which is
timeless but which determines the time frame of that space. As a practical example, most
preclears consider the childhood home an orientation point and themselves a symbol of that
orientation point. Where a preclear has lost too many orientation points successively he begins
to consider himself a symbol of a symbol. The concept in some religions of God being
everywhere and every place at the same time is a direct and overt effort to loose the worshipper
by taking from him a finite position for his orientation point. The processing of the granting of
beingness is more complex and therefore less effective than using the communication formula
in its simpler form. It is well within the attention of an auditor, and the problems involving it
should, to some degree, be resolved with the preclear. The preclear has many times sought to
give life to something such as a dying ally or pet or enterprise and has failed to bring it to life.
Resultingly he has become convinced that he cannot grant life. But senior to this granting of life
is the mechanical matter of orientation point and symbol. A multitude of processes can be
applied with profit to this subject. One of the simplest would be to demand of the preclear,
30.‘Where are you from?’ and then continue to repeat this question on and on and on, no matter
what answer the preclear gave, until the preclear replies that he is from right where he is. At
which time the auditor changes the question to ‘Where is that?’ And to any answer the preclear
gives, again asks ‘Where is that?’ until the preclear ceases to locate himself by his environment
and then ceases to locate himself by his body and by himself and comes to the realization that
he is exactly where he says he is and no other place. The other-determinism to self-determinism
course is marked by the fact that he is first nowhere, then where old orientation points and
present locations tell him where he is, and then where his body tells him where he is, and then
where he seems to be because he can see certain things, to the final realization that he is where
he is by postulate and by that alone. This will exteriorize a preclear if continued long enough.
All other processes are only a covert level of this process. He can be made to spot spots which
he has considered orientation points, such as the childhood home, and then remedy
havingness. He can be asked why the environment is there, and for every answer simply ask
again why what he is looking at is there. Or this can be run as the third step of Procedure 30,
which is what it is. As the third step of Procedure 30, Granting of Beingness is run in this
fashion, ‘Who would grant beingness to ...?’ And in the blank may be placed psychosomatics,
letters, cats, dogs, kings and coal heavers or anything the auditor might think of, each time
until the preclear replies without communication lag. The key question would be, ‘Who would
it be all right to have grant some beingness?’ The person the preclear will name will be the
person the preclear has most recently depended upon thoroughly as a symbol in lieu of an
orientation point. This is continued with ‘What else would it be all right for ... (the person he
has named) to grant beingness to?’ With this last question we are resolving the ‘only one’
complex. The preclear has gotten into a state, ordinarily, where he is the only one who can
grant beingness, but he has so long restrained other people from granting life to things that he
himself will no longer grant any life to things. The preclear is engaged in some kind of a giddy
contest whereby nobody else can grant beingness to things, but he can grant beingness to them.
The resolution of this will mean a considerable increase in case. There is an additional question,
‘Who are you eating for?’ and ‘Who are you doing other things for?’ item by item, which
processed continuously will eventually bring the preclear into certain changes of consideration.
This last technique is a part of one called ‘Swizzle-Stick’. An additional process is to simply
have the preclear say to himself, ‘I am here’. And each time establish for himself the fact that he
is. This is done over and over without further variation. A part of the granting of beingness is
having symbols ‘out there moving around for you’. An individual who cannot be an
orientation point and who cannot, therefore, grant beingness does not have symbols. Thus he
cannot predict objects even in the immediate environment. A variation is to have him look at
various objects and the walls of the room and predict that they will be there in ten seconds,
then, to have him count off the ten seconds and find out whether or not they are there.
R2-22: SPANNING ATTENTION
Scarcity of attention is manifested on a gradient scale from the top to the bottom on the
Chart of Human Evaluation. An individual has so many times excused his failure to direct
attention when it was required by saying that he had not enough attention that eventually things
which sought to seize his attention ‘distract him’. This brings on a certain franticness. Scarcity
of attention is the reason why a preclear cannot look at past engrams and present time at the
same time and, be in present time. His attention gets caught or trapped in the past. The scarcity
of attention can be directly remedied by having the preclear put his attention on one object until
it is thoroughly real to him, then on another object until it is thoroughly real to him, and then
put his attention on both objects until they are thoroughly real to him, then his attention on a
third object until it is thoroughly real to him, and then his attention on all three objects until they
are completely real to him. The caution which must be taken is that one does not fixate his
attention on the objects but keeps him answering questions concerning the objects. In all
attention processes, an hypnotic condition takes place only when the preclear is unable to
comment or respond while his attention is closely fixed upon one object. The body gives the
thetan scarcity of attention and therefore a sort of hypnotic trance by having only one direction
of attention, i.e., through the eyes. A thetan seeing on a 360 degree periphery, when
interiorizing into the head, finds himself looking in only one direction. This is sufficient to
31.fixate him. Exteriorization by Attention is possible simply by directing the preclear’s attention
to wider and wider spheres. The technique Spanning of Attention is done with the following
commands. The auditor put a match down in front of the preclear, ‘Now look at that match’,
‘Is it real to you?’ The auditor puts down another match close to the first match, ‘Now look at
the second match’, ‘Is it real to you?’ and then works with such question until both the first and
second match are real. The auditor then has him put his attention on both matches at once to
establish whether or not they are both real at once. Then he has him look at the first match, the
second match, and then both matches in that order until the preclear can see both matches as
entirely real. A third match is now put down, the auditor saying, ‘Now put your attention on
this third match’. ‘Is it real to you?’ When reality on the third match is established, the auditor
has the preclear see the first two matches at once, then the second and third matches at once
until these two groups, as groups, are real and then has the preclear look at all three matches
until they are real. WITH THIS PROCESS THE PRECLEAR’S ATTENTION IS NOT
PERMITTED TO LINGER ON ANY ONE OBJECT FOR MORE THAN A FEW SECONDS.
CONTINUOUS STARING AT THE OBJECT WILL NOT PRODUCE ANY FURTHER
RESULT THAN BOIL OFF. THIS PROCESS IS CONTINUED UNTIL THE PRECLEAR
CAN DO THIS -- SEE WITH ENTIRE REALITY TEN MATCHES SIMULTANEOUSLY
LAID OUT IN FRONT OF HIM. Now the auditor begins by taking an object in the room,
such as a chair, has the preclear examine that until it is entirely real, then takes another chair in
the room and establishes its reality with the preclear. Then he works on the first and second
chairs and on both until the preclear can see both chairs with complete reality. Then a third chair
is picked out and reality is established on the first and second chair, and the second and third
chair, and then on all three chairs. This is done until all the objects in the room are included in
the reality of the preclear, at which time he will very probably be exteriorized.
R2-23: ATTENTION BY DUPLICATION
Two similar objects, preferably black and not shiny, are placed before the preclear in
such a way that they are more or less even with his level gaze and making with each other and
the preclear’s space a 90 degree angle so that the preclear has to turn at least 45 degrees out of
his normal line of sight in order to put his attention on either one of them. The preclear’s
attention is directed to object one on the right and then is asked to put his attention on object
two on the left. ‘Put your attention on the right hand object’, ‘Put your attention on the left
hand object’. These two commands are then given consecutively many, many times, each time
the auditor waiting for the preclear’s execution of the command before giving the next
command. The process can be done with only these two commands, for the preclear is not
asked to fix his attention on either object, he is only asked to look at these two objects. If there
is any question about the preclear’s general reality, this should be remedied by Opening
Procedure of 8-C. Further, the preclear, prior to the process, no matter what his reality may be,
should be put into communication with the two objects. This process is often found to be more
workable by having the preclear describe the objects he is looking at each time he looks at
them. This keeps the preclear outflowing. And where the preclear begins to demonstrate
hypnotic manifestations, the step of making him describe each object should be used. The
commands would be ‘Now put your attention on object one’. The preclear executes. ‘Tell me
about it.’ The preclear does so. ‘Now put your attention on object two.’ The preclear does so.
‘Tell me about it’, ‘Put your attention on object one’, and so forth, over and over. This process
should be run as long as it produces perception changes in the preclear. Attention by
Duplication can be applied to any sense perception. Here we have the example of it applied to
sight. This step should also apply to Attention by Duplication by hearing. If there is a noise in
the room, preferably a monotonous one such as a motor or fan or even a record of a
monotonous voice but not the radio, the auditor commands the preclear, ‘Listen to that ...’
naming the source of sound. And when the preclear has done so for a moment, ‘Now put your
attention on the silence present in the room’, ‘Now on the ...’ again naming the source of
sound. ‘Now on the silence’, back and forth for a considerable length of time. A second
step, both in Attention by Duplication for sight and Attention by Duplication for hearing, is
accomplished by adding in the commands, ‘Now take your attention off ...’ before the next
command to put his attention on something is given. In this wise the commands would be for
32.attention by sight, ‘Put your attention on object one’ and when the preclear has complied,
‘Now take your attention off of object one’ and the preclear has complied, ‘Now put your
attention on object two’ and when the preclear has complied, ‘Now take your attention off of
object two’ and so on back and forth between the two objects. An additional step can be run
having the preclear decide when to take his attention off the objects. This is similar to the
pattern of Opening Procedure of 8-C with the addition that it is run by monotonous duplication
of the process and the objects.
R2-24: EXTERIORIZATION BY DISTANCE, EXTROVERTED AND
INTROVERTED ALTERNATELY
The simplest form of Exteriorization by Distance is accomplished simply by having the
preclear sit still and spot various objects in the room without calling his attention to any distance
involved. This would be done with this one command and with no further qualification as to
what the preclear puts his attention on, ‘Find another spot in this room’. This can be run for
hours with benefit. All other Exteriorization by Distance processes are simply complications of
this basic process. The next most used Exteriorization by Distance process uses three spots in
the room on these commands, ‘Find three spots in your body’ and when the preclear signifies
that he has, ‘Now find three spots in the room’. And when the preclear signifies that he has,
‘Find three spots in your body’. And when the preclear signifies that he has, ‘Now find three
spots in the room’. This is done over and over without any change of command. This process
is commonly run on groups. Spotting one spot at a time, not designating whether it is in space
or on objects, may also be run on groups as above. When a preclear’s reality on
Exteriorization’ by Distance is very poor the simpler forms of this process as above should be
used. The commands of Exteriorization by Distance are as follows, ‘What distance could you
tolerate to your right foot?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to your left foot?’ ‘What distance
could you tolerate to your genitals?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to your stomach?’ ‘What
distance could you tolerate to your rectum?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to your back?’
‘What distance could you tolerate to your right hand?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to your
left hand?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to your right eye?’ ‘What distance could you
tolerate to your left eye?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to your mouth?’ and then
consecutively ‘What distance could your right foot tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could
your left foot tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could your stomach tolerate to a thetan?’
‘What distance could your genitals tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could your rectum
tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could your right hand tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance
could your left hand tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could your right eye tolerate to a
thetan?’ ‘What distance could your left eye tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could your
mouth tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could your back tolerate to a thetan?’
This complete series on the body is called the introverted part of the process and is
immediately followed by these commands: ‘What distance could you tolerate to the front wall?’
‘What distance could you tolerate to the right wall?, ‘What distance could you tolerate to the left
wall?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to the back wall?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to
the floor?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate to the ceiling?’ ‘What distance could you tolerate
to your chair?’ and this is followed by: ‘What distance could the front wall tolerate to a thetan?’
‘What distance could the right wall tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could the left wall
tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could the back wall tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance
could the floor tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What distance could the ceiling tolerate to a thetan?’ ‘What
distance could your chair tolerate to a thetan?’ And this is followed by the first of the series on
the body, ‘What distance could you tolerate to your right foot?’ and so forth, around and
around on these commands.
IMPORTANT: THE PRECLEAR MUST NOT BE PERMITTED TO USE MOCK-UPS
IN THE MATTER OF WHAT DISTANCE THE PARTS OF THE BODY OR THE
ROOM COULD TOLERATE TO A THETAN. THE AUDITOR WANTS THE ACTUAL
PARTS OF THE BODY RIGHT WHERE THEY ARE AND THEIR TOLERANCE TO THE
THETAN IN EACH CASE. AND HE WANTS THE PARTS OF THE ROOM RIGHT
33.WHERE THEY ARE AND THEIR DISTANCE TO THE THETAN. THIS PROCESS IS
NOT TO BE DONE BY MOCK-UPS. BUT IF MOCK-UPS APPEAR IN THE MATTER OF
WHAT DISTANCE THE THETAN CAN TOLERATE TO THE PARTS OF THE BODY OR
ROOM THEY ARE ALLOWABLE BUT ARE NOT ENCOURAGED. IF MOCK-UPS ARE
USED IN THE MATTER OF DISTANCE OF THE OBJECTS TO THE THETAN, THE
REALITY OF THE PRECLEAR WILL DECREASE MARKEDLY. THE PRECLEAR IS
NOT BEING EXTERIORIZED FROM MOCK-UPS, HE IS BEING EXTERIORIZED
FROM ACTUAL PHYSICAL UNIVERSE OBJECTS.
R2-25: VIEWPOINT AND VIEWPOINT ARC STRAIGHTWIRE
Viewpoint and Viewpoint ARC Straightwire in a brief form has the following
commands, ‘Give me some things which it would be comfortable for you to look at’. And
when the communication lag on this is flattened, ‘Give me some emotions it would be all right
for you to look at’, ‘Give me some efforts it would be all right for you to look at’. These are
the chief concerns of the auditor in this process: The auditor must make sure that the preclear is
absolutely certain he is comfortable in viewing such objects. The process fails when the auditor
is incapable of pressing the preclear until this certainty is attained.
Viewpoint ARC Straightwire then follows, ‘Who would it be all right for you to like?’
And, as in any of these questions, when the communication lag has been fattened by repeated
use of the first question, ‘Who would it be all right for you to agree with?’ ‘Who would it be all
right for you to communicate with?’ ‘Who would it be all right to have like, you?’ ‘Who would
it be all right to have agree with you?’ ‘Who would it be all right to have communicate with
you?’ The basic formula and goal of this process is to increase the preclear’s ability to tolerate
views. The auditor is trying to do two things. He is trying to improve the tolerance and comfort
of the preclear in viewing and experiencing knowingness, lookingness, emotingness,
effortingness, thinkingness, symbolizingness, eatingness, sexingness, and mystery.
R2-26: REMEDY OF LAUGHTER
The earliest known psychotherapy consisted of getting a patient to laugh. Laughter is
rejection. A preclear being continually inflowed upon by the physical universe at length may
find it difficult to reject anything. Getting him to reject something could be made an auditing
goal. The best manifestation of this is laughter. Laughter includes both surprise and rejection.
The individual is surprised into rejecting. In order to laugh, he must have laid aside some of his
ability to predict. An individual who is serious has laid aside so much of his ability to predict
that he now cannot be surprised into rejection. The anatomy of mystery consists of, in this
order, unpredictability, confusion, and chaos covered up because it cannot be tolerated.
Therefore, this is also the anatomy of problems. Problems always begin with an
unpredictability, deteriorate into a confusion, and then if still unsolved become a mystery which
is massed confusion. It will be observed that as a person falls further and further away from the
ability to laugh he becomes more and more confused until at last he sees no points in any jokes,
he sees only embarrassment when confronted by laughter, and the whole action of laughter
itself escapes him. The ability to laugh is rehabilitated in general by Scientology as it advances
the ability of the preclear to know -- which is to say, predict. The Remedy of Laughter could be
entered simply by having the individual predict that a wall would be there in ten seconds, count
off ten seconds on his watch, and then ascertain with thoroughness that the wall is still there, to
establish if the wall is there, then to predict that it will be there in ten seconds, then to count off
ten seconds on his watch and ascertain if the wall is still there. By thus bringing solid objects
into the realm of prediction, an individual at length comes to a point where he can predict very
slowly moving objects. A cheap train and track could be set up for this purpose and the preclear
could be led to predict with accuracy the position of engines on the small circular track.
However, the preclear can be made to watch automobiles on the street -- a process which
serves just as well with no such equipment. The preclear would then be led to predict the
positions of his own body, first by predicting that it was going to be in a certain spot, then
34.moving it there and seeing whether or not it had arrived at that spot. He would then be brought
to swing his arm in a circle, predict that it would swing faster, and swing it faster. And thus
being led to predict the motion of his body with these simplicities, he could be exercised in
making his body go tense and go limp by his command until he was thoroughly certain that he
could both predict the tension or relaxation by doing it. Then he could be led to predict the
positions of people walking on the street until he felt some security in predicting without
exercising physical control. By thus remedying his ability to predict, one brings the preclear up
into a tolerance of motion. He is then led to put his attention on one moving object, then on two
moving objects at once, and so forth using the processes of spanning attention on moving
objects. A direct mock-up process can be applied to the Remedy of Laughter by having the
preclear mock up alternately himself and others laughing or by having him mock up an
acceptable level of amusement and remedy his havingness with it until he can have people
laughing very broadly in his mock-ups.
The preclear can also be made simply to stand up and start laughing. He at first will
demand to have something to laugh at, but at length will be able to laugh without reason. The
goal of the process is contained in the last line -- to regain the ability to laugh without reason. In
this Intensive Procedure only two steps are employed to remedy laughter. The first consists of
these commands, ‘Be completely certain that the wall is there’. And when the preclear has
become with considerable conversation completely certain that the wall is there, touching it,
pushing against it, and so forth, the auditor then says, ‘Sit down, take this (your) watch’,
‘Now predict that the wall will be there ten seconds from now’, ‘Have you done so?’ ‘All right
wait ten seconds by your watch’. And when this is done, ‘Is the wall still there?’ And when the
preclear has answered, ‘Now make absolutely certain the wall is there’ and the preclear does so
by touching it, pushing at it, kicking it. ‘Now make very sure that the wall is there.’ And when
the preclear very vigorously has done so, ‘Now predict that it will be there in ten seconds’.
And when the preclear has done so, the remainder of the commands are given and this is
repeated over and over. Then the second part of Intensive Procedures process of laughter, but
only after the preclear has experienced considerable relief and is absolutely sure that he can
predict that all parts of the room will be there, not only in ten seconds, but in an hour --
although no such timing is used, and only ten seconds of time is employed -- ‘Start laughing’.
And no matter what the preclear says thereafter, or what arguments he advances, or how many
things he asks about, or how many reasons he wants or gives, the auditor merely says (adding
words that urge the preclear), ‘Start laughing’. And when the preclear at length does so, no
matter how half heartedly, ‘keep on laughing’. The two commands which are used in addition
to Words necessary to urge the preclear without giving the preclear any reason whatsoever are,
‘Start laughing’ and ‘keep on laughing’. This process is then done until the preclear can
actually enjoy a laugh without any reason whatsoever, without believing that laughing without
reason is insane, without feeling self-conscious about laughing, and without needing any boost
from the auditor. The auditor in this second part need take no pains to agree with the preclear
by laughing. He need not chuckle or smile nor need he even particularly act seriously, his
laughter is not needed or used in the process. An auditor can be as serious as he pleases, and
indeed, if he wishes to do so, can be even more serious than is usual when running this second
step of R2-26. In earlier Scientology it was learned that serious preclears would often recover
considerable ground simply when they were made to do things without any reason whatsoever.
This achievement is much greater when they are made to laugh without any reason.
R2-27: RESOLVE DANGEROUSNESS OF ENVIRONMENT
Resolving the Dangerousness of the Environment could be done in many ways, but by
experience it should not be done by deleting various things which could be dangerous by the
use of mock-ups. If there is any trouble with the preclear it is that the environment is
insufficiently dangerous and so does not produce sufficient amusement. The physical body
was built in the time when escapes from death by wild animals, by falling, were routine. It was
built in an operating climate of great hazard over a period of many millions of years. It requires
about three escapes from sudden death daily to stay in present time. Many of the preclears
being audited in Scientology are being audited simply to experience a new adventure.
35.However, it can be said with some truth, and was said in ‘Excalibur’ in 1938, that a man is as
sane as he is dangerous to the environment. What occurs is that the environment becomes
dangerous to the man and the man cannot be dangerous to the environment. And his answer to
this is immobility and general deterioration. The basic remedy of this condition consists of
getting a living thing -- a pet, a child, a sick person -- to reach out towards one’s hand. At that
moment, without moving so suddenly that the living being will be startled, the person doing the
process would withdraw his hand. The auditor would then advance, again to be driven away,
over and over. And it would be observed that the living being would strike out with more and
more enthusiasm and would recover considerable sanity. This, of course, is done on a gradient
scale. While an auditor should know and use this basic process in assists or when processing
animals, very small children or people who are extremely ill, the remedy which is used in
Intensive Procedure is Cause and Effect. Parts of the body can be used in this process, the
whole body, or the thetan. But the auditor must be specific about what he is addressing. The
basic commands are, ‘What are you willing to cause?’ And when the preclear has answered this
and the communication lag on the question has been fattened, ‘What are you willing to be the
effect of.’ And when the communication lag has been flattened by the repeated use of this
question, ‘What are you willing to cause?’ and so forth, using just these commands. One can
additionally apply this, particularly when the preclear has a psychosomatic illness, to a limb or
organ of the body as an assist. But in Intensive Procedure, the most permissive of these
questions, as given, is used.
R2-28: NOTHING - SOMETHING
Nothing - Something is run by asking, ‘What distance wouldn’t you mind making
nothing of? and when there is no communication lag on this, ‘What distance wouldn’t you
mind making something of (making longer)?’ The process is completed by making certain the
preclear can tolerate many nothingnesses and many somethingnesses with complete comfort. If
the preclear found R2-24 unreal or did it peculiarly, use R2-28 immediately, then R1-10, then
R2-24. The goal of this process is the toleration of nothingnesses and somethingnesses by the
thetan.
R2-29: TIME TOLERANCE
This uses the velocity factor of the communication formula. (A) Ask the preclear ‘Now
much time can you tolerate between yourself and (the door) (the window) (etc.)?’ Then make
him ‘walk it out’ in the interval of time he named. Have him do this until, without coaching, he
can tolerate a very very slow velocity or a very fast one. (B) Then use this command, ‘Start
lying about your past’ and when he finally does, ‘Keep on lying about your past’ until he can
lie with complete comfort about all phases of his past. (C) Then use this, ‘What is the
significance of your past?’ and keep on asking the question, no matter what the preclear says,
until his past is not important. Then ‘What is the significance of your future?’ (or goals, if that
communicates better, ‘What are your goals in your future?’) and keep on asking it until the
preclear feels free to live an unplanned life. NOTE: The present time problem is best resolved
by remedying the havingness of the preclear on the subject or people involved in the problem.
Have him mock these up in acceptable form and accept many. Then, in rejectable form, and
reject many until his ‘acceptance level’ and ‘rejection level’ are the same.
R2-30: POSITION BY SECURITY (SOP 8-D)
This is used in Intensive Procedure for only two purposes, to resolve a present time
association with a person (Present Time Problem) or to resolve ‘Body Recruitment’ of the
Thetan by some part of the body such as teeth, eyes, stomach, etc. In the matter of a present
time problem, using the person involved With the preclear’s name, ‘Where would ... be safe?’
and ‘Where would ... find you safe?’ as the sole commands, actually having the preclear spot
the locations in the MEST universe. In the matter of fixation on teeth, etc., ‘Where would ... be
36.safe?’ ‘Where would ... find you safe?’ Body Recruitment is suspected whenever a preclear
cannot exteriorize after a few hours of processing. The part of the body he is most anxious
about is then run as responsible for dragging ‘in’ the thetan.
Another method of running this problem is a variation of Description Processing. The
commands are ‘Now close does your ... seem to you now?’ This is the only command
employed. Body parts such as head, genitals, teeth, or the body itself are used in the place of
the blank.
R2-31: BEINGNESS PROCESSING
The cardinal rule where mental or physical compulsions are concerned follows:
WHATEVER THE THETAN IS DOING OBSESSIVELY OR COMPULSIVELY, HAVE
HIM DO IT ON A SELF-DETERMINED BASIS.
This applies to machines, habits, twitches, etc.
There is a gradient scale of exteriorization which could be described as follows: first,
the thetan without contact With a universe then a thetan in full contact with a universe then a
thetan in contact with part of a universe, who considers the remainder of the universe barred to
him then a thetan in a universe without any contact with any part of the universe then a thetan
unknowingly in contact with a large part of a universe. The first condition would be a true
Static, the last condition is called colloquially in Scientology, ‘buttered all over the universe. As
it is with a universe such as the physical universe, so it is with physical bodies. The thetan who
has already gone through the cycle on the universe itself may be in contact with a physical body
in the same order. At first he would be without association with a physical body then with
occasional contact with bodies then with a fixed contact on one body, but exteriorized then
interiorized into a body, but easy to exteriorize then in contact with and interiorized into a body,
but withdrawn from the various parts of the body and then obsessively ‘buttered all through the
body’ then obsessively and unknowingly drawn down to some small portion of the body, and
so forth. This is the gradient scale which includes inversion and then inversion of the
inversion. The auditor will discover preclears are very variable in the matter of exteriorization.
Some preclears, even when they have a dark field, exteriorize rather easily. Others, after a great
deal of work, are still found to be difficult to exteriorize. The matter of exteriorization is the
matter of which level of inversion the preclear is in. One of the more difficult levels to work is
so inverted that he thinks that a thetan is running him. In other words, here is a thetan
functioning in a body and actually running it through various covert communication lines, who
yet believes he is a body to such an extent that he considers himself, or any life around him to
be some other being. When discussing the matter of a thetan, this preclear is likely to tell the
auditor, ‘I’m over there’. This is about the only signal the auditor gets from such a case which
tells him that the preclear is being a body, and considers that he is being run by another thetan.
Very often an auditor will ‘exteriorize’ such a person, he thinks, only to have the preclear say,
‘I’m over there’. A thetan who knows he is a thetan is always ‘here’ and never ‘there’.
The diagnostic manifestation, however, which the auditor first encounters in any case
where he is having difficulty with exteriorization is contained in Beingness. Those on lower
levels of inversion are having a great deal of difficulty being anything. Such people are below
the level of being a body, therefore it would be far up-scale for this person to be able to be a
body with certainty. A person who cannot exteriorize easily must be brought up to the level
where he can be a body before he can then be exteriorized from the body. In other words, an
auditor exteriorizing anyone has to follow such a scale as Beingness Processing.
Oddly enough, Beingness Processing is an excellent exteriorization tool, and I say
‘Oddly enough’ because, in one sense, Beingness Processing is an Alter-is-ness process.
When a case is extremely inverted it is necessary to get the case up to a level where it can
identify itself with something. Beingness is essentially an identification of self with an object.
37.The commands used in Beingness Processing should begin with the environment and
the vicinity of the preclear. One has the preclear look around the auditing room and select an
object, let us say a chair. The auditor does this by saying ‘Look around the room and discover
some object which you don’t mind being present’. Remember always, that when an auditor
asks a question, that question has to be answered by the preclear. It is the auditor’s bad luck if
he asks a question which introduces an enormously long communication lag in the preclear.
The preclear must still answer the question. At this question, then, ‘Discover something you
don’t mind being present’, it is necessary that the preclear actually locate something, even if a
dust mote. The auditor then asks the preclear to ‘Locate something else you don’t mind being
present’. And when all communication lag is gone from this level of process, the auditor then
picks out an object which the preclear was comfortable about and says: ‘Now see this (chair)
here’, ‘All right, what else wouldn’t you mind this (chair) being?’ And then, as the preclear
answers this, and using this same object, the auditor continues to ask the same question until all
communication lag is gone from the question: ‘What else wouldn’t you mind this (chair)
being?’
The auditor then selects other objects in the area and uses the same question on them:
‘What wouldn’t you mind this (couch) being?’, ‘What else wouldn’t you mind this (couch)
being?’ When the preclear is perfectly willing to have anything in the room be a large number
of things, including the walls, the ceiling, and the floor the auditor asks: ‘Now what wouldn’t
you mind your body being?’ And whatever the preclear answers, ‘And now what else wouldn’t
you mind your body being?’ Finally, when the preclear is able to do all the foregoing in
Beingness Processing, the auditor commands him: ‘Now let’s find something you wouldn’t
mind being’, and, as this is the question for which the auditor has been working, he uses this
question for a very long period of time, asking over and over, ‘What else wouldn’t you mind
being?’
It will be discovered in working Beingness Processing that the entire mechanism of
winning Valences occurs. Here, for instance, is a thetan who is caught in a theta trap. After a
while he will consider that the trap itself is surviving, which is to say that the motions of the
trap have themselves set the thetan into motion so that he now thinks of himself totally as a
trap. (This is how anybody gets to be anything -- by getting set into motion by the vibrations in
his vicinity.)
At first the thetan is willing to be the trap, but after a while, if asked to be the trap and
then asked to be the thetan (and this is not a process), the most terrible apathy will be found to
intervene between the two steps. The thetan, while fairly comfortable being the trap, on
beginning to recover some of his own identity, will be found to be at a point on the tone scale
so low as to contain an unbearable and agonizing apathy.
Beingness Processing recovers the various valences which the thetan is trying to avoid.
As a practical example in life, we find a housewife who is incapable of keeping house.
Although intelligent and able in most things, we find she cannot sweep, make beds, or even
shop for the house. We discover that her mother was an excellent housekeeper, an excellent
cook, and could shop very well. If this is the case, then we would also discover that the one
person in this world our preclear does not want to be is her mother. In other words, by being
unable to be her mother, she is also unable to be all those things which her mother could do or
be. In other words, the matter of valences is also a matter of packages of abilities, and where an
individual is unable to be something which has certain definite abilities, he also cannot achieve
those abilities, and this, in itself, is the heart of disability.
In running Beingness Processing it will be discovered that the imagination of the
preclear revives to a marked extent. This is a process which requires a skilled auditor, a patient
auditor, and one who is willing to level every communication lag he encounters by repeating
the same question over and over, each time waiting to receive a definite answer. It is not a
process which one starts and leaves uncompleted.
R2-32: ASSIGNMENT OF ATTRIBUTES
38.The forerunner of this process was Significance Processing. Significance Processing
was done as follows: one had the preclear take some picture or object and assign innumerable
significances to it.
This is an excellent process, even now, for those who are always looking for deeper
significances in everything. It will be discovered that the preclear with whom one is having
difficulty cannot duplicate. He cannot duplicate because he has to make everything more
complicated. Everything which is given to him has to be given a deeper significance.
However, Significance Processing is quite limited in its effects upon the preclear, and it is not
to be compared with SOP 8-C Opening Procedure. Where one has a case who is introducing
deep significances into everything, who is pondering and philosophizing during processing,
one will discover that Significance Processing is far too heavy for the case.
Opening Procedure of 8-C is all that is indicated for this case for many hours, and this
should be followed by Opening Procedure by Duplication for many more hours.
The Assignment of Attributes is a process which uses the principle: WHATEVER THE
THETAN IS DOING OBSESSIVELY OR COMPULSIVELY, HAVE HIM DO IT ON A
SELF-DETERMINED BASIS.
Here we have the entire environment assigning meanings and attributes to the preclear.
It seldom occurs to the preclear to assign attributes to himself. Throughout life he has been
insulted, made nothing of, or complimented, and he has begun to depend upon other-determined
assignment of attributes.
The commands of this process are as follows: ‘Assign some attributes to other people’.
Now, if at this stage the preclear wants to know what an attribute is, the auditor can tell him ‘a
quality, characteristic, or ability, factual, insulting, or flattering’. The auditor continues with
this command for some time and then as: ‘Now have some people assign some attributes to
you’, and, ‘Have them assign you some more attributes’, then ‘some more’, and ‘Have them
assign you some more attributes’. One then returns to the first command: ‘Assign some people
some attributes’) and so forth. Finally, when the preclear is able to do this easily, the auditor
goes to this step of the process: ‘Now assign your body some attributes’, and continues to have
the preclear assign to his body attributes. Preclears have exteriorized on this process.
The preclear uses insults, compliments, abilities, skills and various states of beingness,
and will be found to be coming up the tone scale with the attributes he is assigning on each
stage of this process.
The auditor should not overlook the fact that this process can be very widely used with
the same type of command on any of the Dynamics or on the Know-to-Mystery scale, such as,
‘Assign some attributes to Mystery’, ‘Assign some attributes to sex’, ‘Assign some attributes
to women’, ‘Assign some attributes to spirits’, using each question repetitively until such time
as all communication lag is gone in the preclear on this process.
R2-33: PERFECT DUPLICATION
Had this process existed in 1950, there would have been no difficulty in Dianetics, for
in the perfect duplicate we find how to vanquish an engram. All one needs to do is to make a
perfect duplicate of the engram, and then make a perfect duplicate of having perfectly duplicated
the engram, in present time, and the engram is gone. This would also apply to ridges or any
other energy manifestation.
It is not the purpose of the Scientologist today to process engrams, or to use this
particular process, and it is only called to his attention that by making a perfect duplicate of an
engram, the engram disappears entirely, except for the action of making the perfect duplicate in
39.present time, but when this is perfectly duplicated, then the engram really is gone. Engrams, or
whole chains of engrams, can be vanquished in a few seconds by perfect duplication.
Thus it may be seen that the theory of a perfect duplicate is a very valuable one.
There are two kinds of duplicates.The word ‘duplicate’ is used, rather sloppily, to
indicate a copy. However, a copy is not a complete duplicate: a copy is a facsimile, and will
remain in suspension as such. A perfect duplicate is one which is made in the same time, in the
same place, with the same energies as the original. Now, if you have not had this explained
thoroughly in class, you may discover it eluding you slightly, so let us take a good solid look at
this, for it means exactly what it says: a perfect duplicate is one which exists in the same instant
of time, in the same place, and has the same mass (or particles) as original. A thetan placing a
perfect duplicate does not do it along side of the original, nor does he put another image inside
the original, nor does he mock up more particles. He makes a perfect duplicate by simply
duplicating the original with itself, with its own time, mass (particles), space and motion.
There is something else he can do with an original object. He can simply look at one
and claim that it is his duplicate.
The perfect duplicate violates the law of universes which keeps space stretched and
causes things to come into existence in the first place, and this law of universes is that two
things cannot occupy the same space at the same time.
We then discover that a universe will vanish, or any part of that universe will vanish,
the moment this law is violated. A perfect duplicate restores the As-is-ness of an object. A
perfect duplicate may also have to contain in it the persistence of the object. It is simply made
by postulate, and because the body itself is making imperfect duplicates continually, which is to
say is copying and making facsimiles continually, it may be that the thetan has fallen into this,
and the making of perfect duplicates is a necessary part of his ability. The auditor should then
take an object right in the room with the preclear, and have the preclear make a perfect duplicate
of the object, then consider it is there again, then make another perfect duplicate of it, then
consider it is there again, then make another perfect duplicate of it, then consider it is there
again. With some preclears who are having a difficult time, it will be found that the object will
become more pronounced and more real for a short time, and only then will begin to vanish.
With thetans who are in fairly good condition, the object dims. With the thetan in excellent
condition, the object vanishes.
The commands are as follows: ‘Do you see this ash tray?’ ‘Now make a perfect
duplicate of it: a duplicate in the same time, in the same place, with the same energy as the ash
tray’.
The preclear may have some difficulty getting this. The auditor should be very
watchful, and should coax the preclear, using any language necessary to bring about the
preclear’s making a perfect duplicate. However, the auditor should not tell the preclear that the
object will vanish, or that it will seem to vanish for the preclear. The auditor should simply
insist that the preclear make a perfect duplicate of the object, in its same time, and same space,
with its same mass or energy. When the preclear finally has this, the auditor then says: ‘Now
consider that it is there again’. When the preclear has done so, the auditor says: ‘Now make a
perfect duplicate of it’, and when the preclear has done so, ‘Now consider that it is there
again’, ‘Make a perfect duplicate of it’. The preclear should be drilled in this until the object
appears to vanish very thoroughly for him. If the preclear is actually in very good condition,
the object simply will vanish.
This skill and understanding should be thoroughly mastered by the preclear before he is
taken on through to Description Processing, R2-34.
Making perfect duplicates of the whole track, which is to say returning to incidents and
making duplicates of them at that moment, or sending a remote viewpoint ‘down the track’ and
40.having it make a perfect duplicate of incidents, and then making a perfect duplicate of having
done so in present time to vanish the present time picture, is the process of vanquishing
engrams. However, if the process is done to wipe out engrams, remember to remedy the
preclears’ havingness as in the last sentences of R2-18.
This practice of As-is-ness, by the way, is the reason why people do not consider it
polite for other people to stare. People have a hangover in that they know, instinctively, that if
they are completely looked at they would disappear.
Having had the preclear learn how to make perfect duplicates, now ask him this
question. ‘Give me some things which are not making perfect duplicates of you’. Many times.
‘Give me some people who are not making perfect duplicates of you’, ‘Give me some things of
which you are not making perfect duplicates’, ‘Give me some people of whom you are not
making perfect duplicates’.
Healing at a glance is done by a thetan, not interiorized, making perfect duplicates of the
illness of a body without perfectly duplicating the body itself. It is not done with energy.
R2-34: DESCRIPTION PROCESSING
Before engaging in Description Processing it will be necessary for the auditor to
perform, with the preclear, R2-33. It is not that the preclear is going to make perfect duplicates
with this Description Processing, but that the preclear has some understanding of what he is
confronting. Description Processing is the single most Powerful Process in Scientology. It
uses As-is-ness in present time to remedy the restimulations beheld by the thetan. The total
command content of Description Processing is the phrase: ‘How does ... seem to you now?’
This is used over, and over, and over by the auditor. In the blank he puts any difficulty the
preclear is having.
For an old-time auditor, for instance, who has become rather laggardly about auditing,
the single question ‘How does auditing seem to you now?’ asked over and over for about three
hours would most probably bring about a complete rehabilitation of the auditor as such.
Here all we are asking the preclear to do is to view the situation. We do not care
whether he makes a perfect duplicate of it or not. We merely want him to observe the situation.
His observance of the situation determines its As-is-ness, and his health depends upon his
ability to accept things as they are. As we run this process we will find that a considerable
amount of change takes place in a case. Energy masses move, alter, shift, and the environment
takes on different aspects. This is not particularly a good manifestation, it is the manifestation
of time, or persistence. We are running an As-is-ness of Alter-is-ness. Thus, the occasional
interjection of ‘Does it seem to be persisting?’ on the part of the auditor, calls the attention of
the preclear to the persistence of the manifestations and clears up hang-ups. Now, here in this
process, we view the entire philosophy of life. We see quite adequately here that an individual
still retains anything which he has never accepted As-is. In other words, if a man has fought
evil for years, he has never viewed evil As-is. Thus evil will remain with him. If he has fought
ugliness for years, ugliness will remain with him. Terribly enough, because he has accepted
As-is the goodness of life, and the beauty of life, these things are continually being un-mocked.
We eat good food -- we leave bad food alone. When something smells bad we turn our face
away from it. Here we have the entire anatomy of the dwindling spiral. We see that individuals
continually take the upper cream off life and leave the skimmed milk, and then take skimmed
milk and leave the drowned flies, until they are trying to go all the way to the bottom to close
with the basic As-is-ness of existence, and this basic As-is-ness is mystery and stupidity.
This works in other ways. An individual walking through life and seeing, for instance,
beautiful people, comes at length into a condition where he does not believe beautiful people
exist, for he has taken their As-is-ness so long that the only thing which can make any effect
upon him are less beautiful people. These he has not un-mocked. Thus we get the entire
41.engram bank backing up those things which were never observed directly. One can understand,
then, that ten thousand years ago in the civilizations of earth there might have been incredible
beauty, and one can easily see that these would have no background in the bank of the preclear.
However, the ugly spots of ten thousand years ago would still be there, and so would bring up
the humdrum routine present time existing without valor, gallantry, or beauty.
This is the anatomy of what Krishna might have meant when he inferred that the bad
must be taken with the good. Here we see, then, the explanation of why some men can tolerate
only disease and dirt, why some can tolerate only poverty, and we behold, in short, the entire
mechanism behind Acceptance Level. Acceptance Level Processing, as contained in the PAB’s
was one method of reaching a betterment of conditions. Description Processing is a far better
method of reaching that condition.
Now let us take, more or less in their order of importance, the various things with
which we fill in ‘How does... seem to you now?’ The auditor be cautioned that he must never
start in on one of these subjects without flattening the communication lag resulting. Any one of
these items which is mentioned here might very well take ten hours of questioning before it
could be run entirely flat, for these are very powerful items. An auditor might as well poison
his preclear as to run this list one item after another without a repetition of the question. The
keynote of this entire process is that the auditor asks this question ‘How does ... seem to you
now.?’ over, and over, and over, and over, interjecting only ‘Does it seem to be persisting?’
The auditor can add dunnage (irrelevant remarks aimed solely to stay in communication with
the preclear) only so long as he does not distract the preclear from this process.
The items used follow: TIME, CHANGE, MOTIONLESSNESS, CREATION,
SURVIVAL, PERSISTENCE, DESTRUCTION, DISTANCE, AGREEMENT,
DISAGREEMENT, STUPIDITY, COPYING, BEAUTY, UGLINESS, PEOPLE, YOU,
SERIOUSNESS, RESISTANCE, RESTRAINT, OBJECTION, NOTHINGNESS, any one of
the DYNAMICS, and any part of the FUNDAMENTALS OF SCIENTOLOGY. In the matter
of time, the preclear must necessarily have been run at least on SOP 8-C Opening Procedure
and Opening Procedure by Duplication before the process is attempted. Additionally, he must
have been run on Perfect Duplicates so as to gain some stability for him in present time on the
subject of looking at things. The question once posed is used over, and over, and over again.
Remember that the process, which is to say the phrase, which turns on a somatic, if repeated
many times, will turn it off.
Now we have special cases of preclears who seem to be having peculiar difficulties.
The first of these is the preclear with the black field. To such a preclear, before anything else
except R2-16 and R2-17 are run, blackness should be run: ‘How does blackness seem to you
now?’ Obviously a thetan has always looked toward the light, the brightness, the form, the
object, and has ever neglected the dark areas. This can be run objectively by having the preclear
sit in a dark room and simply have him look at the darkness, which is the poorer of the
methods, by test, or the auditor can have the preclear close his eyes and run the process. If an
auditor must address a psychosomatic illness, it is only necessary for him to ask: ‘How do
your (legs, hands, eyes) seem to you now?’ using one of them at a time. The lame can walk
simply if asked: ‘How do your legs seem to you now?’ enough times.
Another version of this was developed by the staff, by combining R2-20, Problems and
Solutions, with Description Processing, with these commands: ‘Can you recall a problem
which concerned you.?’ When the preclear does, ‘How did it seem to you then?’ When he
describes this, ‘How does it seem to you now?’ He is then asked for another problem, using
the same commands.
DO NOT FORGET TO REMEDY HAVINGNESS ON A PRECLEAR WHEN YOU
RUN ANY AS-IN-NESS PROCESS SUCH AS R2-34.
R2-35: LOCATION PROCESSES
42.This is an entire class of processes which depends upon the utterance of one
challenging question as to location, and repeats that question over and over many times. The
simplest phrasing of this is: ‘Where are you now?’ The auditor, no matter how maddening it
may seem to the preclear, simply continues to ask this question. This question, asked for an
hour, produces singular results in a preclear. But a word of warning: this question should not
be asked of some preclear who is still struggling on SOP 8-C Opening Procedure, or who is
definitely out of contact with present time, for the process is butchery. A very effective use of
this process is contained in the phrase, ‘Where is your face?’ This applies very specifically to
people who are exteriorized. It does not occur to them sometimes for an hour of ‘Where is your
face?’ that they themselves have no face, and that they are still locating the body’s face. They
have to understand this on their own.
R2-36: SELF-DETERMINISM
As an up-to-date Scientologist knows, Self-Determinism as an ideal state went out the
window with Dianetics. As long as you consider yourself intimately one thing confronting
another thing which is not yourself you are not balanced in your environment. Self-Determinism
is a much higher peak than that attained by Homo Sapiens previously, but, in
Scientology, there is a much better concept -- that of Pan-Determinism.
There are all manner of traps and social twists to keep a person located and identified
with one object. The society insists that one have a label. It should be called to the attention of
anyone interested in auditing that a symbol has ‘three M’s’, Mass, Meaning, and Mobility. As
soon as one accepts entirely meaning, such as a name, and accepts intimately mass, and is
made to be mobile, one is then dependent to some degree upon some orientation point in order
to have space. One is inhibited in constructing space. Therefore the goal of processing in
Scientology is not Self-Determinism. The goal of processing is Pan-Determinism. Spanning of
Attention and other processes go in this direction.
The practicality of Pan-Determinism is immediately seen in an elementary,
if uncommon, situation where one is being robbed. If one continues to be solely one’s
self, the determinism of the robber is left entirely free. The way to combat a robber is, while
one is being robbed, be the robber, and go away.
Here, immediately, we cross the bridge into a complete First Dynamic. A complete First
Dynamic is a Pan-Determined Dynamic. All earlier processes of Dianetics and Scientology audit
mainly the Third Dynamic. The subject of Pan-Determinism is a very touchy subject on a social
line, for it becomes apparent immediately that bravery in the face of odds, while dramatic, is
less than optimum. One should simply be the target and the odds at the same time. Here we
have the whole question of randomity. Randomity comes about when one selects out and gives
determinism to another entity or object. This tells you immediately that the problem of healing
at a distance could be looked upon with some favor, and this would be true if the concept of
Nirvana were true, where all life comes about as a fragmentation of Life. But this is no essay or
determination of whether it is bad or good to heal at a distance, or to do healing of the kind
which Christ did. The only thing I would care to say on the subject at this time is that if one
does healing of this character simply that he should do it well and thoroughly. Such healing
does not happen to make Self-Determined individuals out of those so healed, but this again is a
matter of ethic and not a matter of practicality. An auditor, by applying processing skills, is
actually making somebody well but he is also bringing that person up to the line toward a
higher goal of Self-Determinism, and if he wishes, up to a higher goal of Pan-Determinism
There could be billions of Pan-Determining individuals, since a universe is composed of time-continua
of particles in common. As long as one does not cross particles into other time-continua
and so get two time-continua, one would not get a mergence of universes.
While there are many processes yet to be delineated on the subject of Self-Determinism
and Pan-Determinism, one can expect people to confuse the condition of ‘buttered all over the
43.universe’, ‘clairvoyance’, ‘telepathy’, and other half-felt, half-experienced things to be taken
up in lieu of clear-sighted, knowing, Pan-Determinism. The first goal of the auditor is to get
somebody up into the Self-Determined category, and then to remember afterwards that a person
can be in a Pan-Determining category. All a thetan has to do to be Pan-Determining is simply
move in back of somebody else’s head. It is as simple as this. A thetan should also be able to
make perfect duplicates of himself.
The recovery of Pan-Determinism is necessary to get somebody out of the rut of
obsessive Self-Determinism. Beingness Processing (R2-31) directly processes obsessive Self-Determinism.
Under the heading of Self-Determinism and Pan-Determinism we have, also, the
subject of Control. The necessity to predict with actual force or energy the future course of an
object is a refusal to have something As-is. Thus, with Control we get persistence, and that
individual whose case will not change is in such a level of persistence and obsessive Self-Determinism
that he must control everything.
The easiest process with which to approach this problem is contained in the command
phrase: ‘Indicate something which is not making space for you’, and when the preclear has,
‘Indicate something else which is not making space for you’, and so forth until we have
recovered certainty and clarity on the viewpoint of dimension. It will be discovered very rapidly
that there are many people making space for the preclear, and that he is to some degree
contained in the universe of each one of these people and has many particles in common with
them.
R2-37: YELLING
In that man has, for a long time, used words to make space, and as any barbaric people
uses noise to make itself big, it will be found that an inhibition of making noise is a major
difficulty on the case of any preclear. When this process is done, the auditor should be very
careful that the preclear will not be suppressed by his environment. It is more than the auditor’s
simply being careful of the neighbors. It is the auditor being careful of the preclear, for the
preclear will be careful of the neighbors. The auditor should take the preclear to some place
where the preclear would be free to yell. The auditing command is: ‘Start yelling’, and ‘keep
yelling’. The preclear can be sent off by himself to yell. If a group is being processed where its
noise will not disturb others, a back and forth interchange between the auditor and the group
will be found beneficial. This process is very limited and has a tendency simply to make people
cheerful, but occasionally some cases are so inhibited on the making of noise that they are
having difficulty with their vocal cords or with their mouths. Tooth trouble can be traced to the
inhibition of making noise. Distaste for singing is equally traced to the making of noise.
This process can also be done by Creative Processing (the making of mock-ups). This
is, at first glance, a body process, but it will be discovered in processing a thetan who is
exteriorized that he is very afraid to make noise In such a case the auditor should exteriorize
him into some place far from the auditor and far from the body, and the auditor should use
Description Processing for a while on the thetan: ‘How does making noise seem to you now?’
and then ‘Start yelling keep on yelling’. This is an exteriorized process.
R2-38: HOLDING ANCHOR POINTS
There are innumerable drills concerning space. In that a thetan, to have vision, must be
able to tolerate or make space, and in that three-dimensional space requires four points, one
sees that a thetan must be able to view three separate anchor points at once to have the illusion
of space.
The hypnotic effect of the body on a thetan is created by narrowing the thetan’s view to
two eyes, one point. The optical trick of seeing depth with two eyes is not seeing three points at
once.
44.The remedy of the ‘hypnotic trance’ of the thetan which makes him believe he is a
body, is the remedy of his looking through eyes at one point. The simplest and most workable
remedy, which results in exteriorization most often, if then after some time, is ‘holding
corners’. The preclear is seated in a chair -- preclears are audited while seated or standing or
walking these days, never lying down -- and is asked to close his eyes.
The commands then are: ‘Close your eyes’, ‘Locate an upper corner of the room behind
you’. When he has done so, ‘Now locate the other upper corner behind you” ‘All right, hold
on to these two corners, and don’t think’. The preclear is quietly enjoined, from time to time,
to continue his attention on the corners and not to think. At the end of 15 minutes the auditor
says, ‘Now find the third corner behind you’, (meaning a lower corner). When the auditor is
assured the preclear has done this, he says, ‘Now hold on to the same two you had before and
the new one’. When the preclear has all three corners at once, the auditor says, ‘Now hold on
to those three corners and don’t think’. The auditor has the preclear continue to do this for at
least fifteen minutes. Then, ‘Now find the fourth back corner’, ‘Now hold all four corners, sit
back and don’t think’. This is done for at least fifteen minutes. The auditor then has the preclear
locate all eight corners of the room, and says, ‘Now hold on to all eight corners of the room, sit
back and don’t think’. Occasionally and quietly checking to see that the preclear is following
the command, the auditor has the preclear do this for at least fifteen minutes.
If this process is to be done longer than this total time of one hour, as indicated in the
above commands, go through the above sequence of commands again as a process for another
hour, do not simply have the preclear hold eight corners for another hour. Put him through
two corners, three, four and eight again as given. In other words, use this sequence every time
you use the process.
If I were processing a difficult preclear I would do Opening Procedure 8-C, R2-16, for
at least fifteen hours, then Opening Procedure by Duplication, R2-17, for five hours, then
Description Processing, R2-34, for five hours, and finally this holding corners for five hours.
And if he stumbled or deteriorated on the way, I would go to R2-16 again and return to where
he had stumbled and finish that off.
R2-39: CONCEIVING SOMETHING INTERESTING
Interest is the keynote of interiorization. A preclear who is difficult to exteriorize has
become so deeply interested in his body that he has become involved with it.
Experimental proof of this exists. When the preclear who won’t exteriorize becomes so
ill that he cannot envision any future for his body, he will exteriorize. Indeed, this is the
mechanism at death. The body will not be useful, has reached past interest to finality and so
the thetan exteriorizes. It is remarkable with what ease. In testing I have purposely brought
experimental preclears -- who were as resistive to exteriorization as any to be found -- to a point
where they believed it was ‘all up’ with the body. They left the body then.
Interest is the consideration above the mechanical action of control. Controlling is
Starting, Changing, Stopping. Deepening of interest is manifested by a passage from watching
to participating. As the thetan watches several particles or bodies in motion he may become
prejudiced in favor of one. He sinks from Pan-Determinism to ‘Self-Determinism’ where ‘Self’
is the one in which he became interested to the exclusion of others or counter to these others.
Now, having become the object, his interest is its interest. It against its environment is a
problem the thetan involves himself in solving. He may do this with something he creates or
something he finds already created. His interest led him to seek to predict its actions in favor of
its survival. When he fails to predict, he may enter a confusion of motion for he ‘does not
know’ the next movement of the object. Confusion then leads to mystery. Thus the anatomy of
mystery begins with interest, leads to ‘Self-Determinism’, leads to Prediction of starting,
changing, and stopping (Control), leads to a shortening of communication lines, may become
at length confusion, and end with mystery.
45.Interest is not bad simply because it leads to interiorization, for interiorization ceases,
by test, when the thetan can no longer feel there is anything more in which to be interested. A
thetan is indestructible.
There are several stages of interest. The qualities of these are represented by the Know-Sex-
Mystery scale. Most notable are those used in the Chart of Human Evaluation. Interest is
at first without particles, then as ‘Self-Determinism’ (effort to determine the future of a ‘self’)
enters, postulates dedicated to control are used. As mis-prediction occurs, particles are
employed to guide and these are of many qualities and solidities such as enthusiasm or anger,
play or work. (See scales.) Inversions take place at those points where the thetan uses the ‘self’
to acquire, notably, eating and sex.
When the thetan becomes doubtful of the continued ‘interest quality’ of the self either
for other selves or himself, there ensues an undecided period where he is ‘not interested’. This
is most marked on a social level. But it also occurs on a ‘self’ level. In such a condition he has
not actually despaired of future interest and has not abandoned the ‘self’ but he declares, often
to continue to be interesting, that he has given up. He only gives up when he abandons the
group as a body or when he abandons the body as a thetan.
The auditor is attempting to exteriorize the preclear so that the preclear can assume a
higher Pan-Determinism on the Dynamics and, usually, so that the preclear can again ‘run a
body’ from outside. Where the auditor so fails, the preclear is under the impression that the
auditor is trying to get him to abandon the body, thus a sort of grief ensues. (See R2-40.)
When interest becomes fixed we have attention. When attention becomes fixed we have
an unawareness of other things than the object of fixation, and a decrease of Pan-Determinism
down to ‘Self-Determinism’. When this fixity of attention goes to an extreme we have a
lessening of Self-Determinism to a point of Other-Determinism. As Self-Determinism lessens,
we find an hypnotic state of ‘total’ other determinism which becomes then Self-Determinism
(dramatization). We discover in this last all the mechanisms of the engram and, as well, the
mechanism of shifting valences. For the preclear assumes the valence of greatest determinism
(winning valence) as being the valence of greatest interest.
The process used to remedy a fixation of interest to the exclusion of self consists of
broadening interest. By the broadening of, interest we do not achieve a liability which will
again collapse, but a greater freedom. Broaden, do not contract, a preclear’s width of interest.
The spheres of interest are the eight Dynamics. A series of concentric spheres each one
larger than the last with the First Dynamic at center and the Eighth Dynamic at the extreme of
any universe gives a spatial picture of interest. When a retreat or inversion occurs, the Eighth,
the extreme outside sphere becomes the inverted First Dynamic, the Seventh becomes the
inverted Second, the Sixth the inverted Third, the Fifth the inverted Fourth, the Fourth the
inverted Fifth, the Third the inverted Sixth, the Second the inverted Seventh, the First the
inverted Eighth. Then they progress, in interest, and Alter-is-ness, outward again. The
inverted Eighth becomes the reinverted First, the inverted Seventh becomes the reinverted
Second and so forth. Each inversion is occasioned by a falling back of interest while yet
retaining contact with the area from which one fell back. Hence we get such manifestations as
‘buttered all over the universe’, and ‘my thetan is over there’ and such ridiculous
manifestations.
The processes of spanning attention, etc., resolve this sort of thing.
Here is the process specifically aimed at interest, for a homo sapiens badly interiorized.
‘Mock up (get an imaginary picture on the most interesting body form other people would
conceive.’ The preclear may not be able to get visible (to him) mock-ups, but he will mock up
something, black or invisible, and this will be the most interesting body form he can conceive.
He is so fixed on it he cannot do otherwise than mock it up.
46.Then have him mock up another by saying: ‘Do it again’, and another, and another.
Have him pull these, visible or not, in upon him to remedy havingness by saying, ‘All right,
now pull those in upon you’.
Then, ‘Mock up the most interesting body form you can conceive’, ‘And now another’,
‘And another’, ‘And another’, ‘Now pull those in upon you’. Now repeat the first command
(other people), have him remedy havingness with what he got. Then the second phrase (his
most interesting body) back and forth time after time. He will learn exactly what he conceives
to be interesting and what he believes others would find interesting.
Do this for at least half an hour. Four hours would be better. His ability to mock up, his
acceptance levels, will change.
The second part of the process consists of a more objective (and better) process. As the
preclear is a Man we can suppose that he is interested in his species, but we may have learned
in part one of this process that he is more interested in other forms than Man. The auditor
assumes that a thetan interiorized into a man would be interested in men or, with an earlier clue,
substitutes another form.
The auditing command is, ‘What other person could you be interested in?’ ‘And now
another one’, ‘And another one’, until a broad array of people are disclosed. Getting the
preclear to pretend he is various objects with various viewpoints also resolves this.
A fundamental way of looking at interest is to qualify its two major divisions as
INTERESTED and INTERESTING.
A thetan in good condition is interested. When he has become a ‘self’ he feels he must
have energy from exterior sources and so he becomes interesting. Interested could be said to be
an outflow. Interesting could be said to be an inflow. Being interested yet leaves one
considerable
freedom. Being interesting pulls in particles upon one and so restricts him. An
interested thetan is the solver of problems. An interesting self is a problem.
More broadly, a thetan is interested in problems. MEST is a problem. The passage
from interested to interesting has many phases. When one is not longer interested, but is only
interesting, he has lost his principle quality as a thetan -- freedom, and the ability to change at
will.
Having the preclear mock up interesting bodies, forms, machines, and universes
discharges much of his interiorized condition and fixation. Then having him look at actual
people and objects and ‘get the idea’ of how it would be to be them and move them about
brings him again towards Pan-Determinism.
NEXT TO THE OPENING PROCEDURES THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT
PROCESS IN INTENSIVE PROCEDURE.
‘Let’s find something in which you could be interested.’ And when the preclear does,
‘Find some more things in which you could be interested’. And when he has, ‘Some more
things’, and so on, with these commands for at least an hour.
Do not use ‘interesting’, use only ‘interested’ -- in other words, process the preclear
towards theta (interested), not towards MEST (interesting).
You can see that the preclear is ‘As-ising’ situations, that he is also broadening attention
and unfixing from the body. The only thing you can do wrong with this process is not to run it
long enough.
47.The process works subjectively but it is well, if the preclear reaches an impasse, to have
him find things in the present time environment in which he can be interested.
Without directing the preclear’s attention to specific things, just by running the
commands, ‘some things in which you could be interested’, exteriorization takes place.
The factors which make interest a very important process is the fact that interest is the
entrance point to havingness. Heretofore we have used attention, but have used it very
sparingly in processing. The reason for this is that attention is into the field of mechanics. It
has, however, become evident that interest is more consideration than attention, and is therefore
attention with intention. Interest, therefore, could be defined as this -attention with an intention
to give or attract attention. If you will have the preclear look around his environment and point
out things which have the intention to alter things, and other things which have the attention to
keep them from altering things, we will discover that we are running time. The intention to alter
and the intention to keep things from altering are together the two factors of change. Interest
added to this gives us the determinism of attention. The auditing commands for this would be:
‘Look around the environment and find some things which have the intention of altering
things’, ‘Now look at them again and get interested in them’ and so forth. ‘took around the
environment now and find some things which have the intention to keep things from altering.
Now get interested in these items one after another’, thus directing the preclear’s attention and
inviting him to mock up interest. It will be readily discovered that he will shift on the time
track, and that he will consider himself detached from time.
The keynote of a preclear who is having a difficult time is that he has no interest in
outside things. One who is having a less difficult time would be interested only in things in his
immediate vicinity. A preclear who is fairly well off has an interest in altering things, or in
keeping them from altering. But unless interest can be given on a postulated basis it is
obsessive. The only reason a preclear keeps a psychosomatic illness around is that a great deal
of residual interest has accumulated in that.
A preclear will have discovered roles up and down the time track which interested
people, and he will be trying to occupy these roles in order to increase his own havingness. If
you were to ask a preclear ‘What were your parents interested in?’ he would eventually recover
from the very things he is suffering from. Quite normally the whole career of a child is
established by the things in which his mother is interested, and the child will try to be those
things in which his mother was interested if his mother’s attention and interest in him has been
slight. Here is the complete backbone of orientation points and symbols. If the orientation point
is interested, the symbols are interesting. When one can no longer be an orientation point, he of
course becomes a symbol and tries to get interest from the orientation point. The basic
orientation points in a family are the parents or grandparents and the symbol is the child.
Usually the preclear has come to the auditor because he feels that the auditor will at least
be interested in him. And when the auditor’s interest in the preclear is not demonstrated in such
ways as not keeping appointments or in failing to let the preclear communicate, the preclear will
worsen in the process. However, such an omission can be remedied, although it shouldn’t
have happened in the first place, by running interest processing. A much later process, OTHER
PEOPLE, can be run by picking out in the preclear some obvious difficulty, such as a bad eye
or a bad leg and have him get interested in the bad eyes and bad legs which he postulates at
people in his vicinity. This puts the preclear into the role of an orientation point and takes him
out of the role of a symbol by making him the one who is interested and makes other people in
his vicinity the ones who are interesting.
A great many significances can of course be entered into this process. One can have the
preclear be interested in things under attack, interested in things not under attack, Picking them
out one after another in the environment. The auditor can have the preclear be interested in the
weakness of MEST, the forgetfulness of MEST, the non-determinism of MEST, and other
factors.
48.The Mystery to Know scale with the addition of Inhibited, Enforced, and Desired, can
be run adding the factor of interest with the following commands: ‘Pick out some things which
are inhibiting mystery’, ‘Now one after the other, get interested in them’, ‘Now pick out some
things which are enforcing mystery’, ‘Now get interested in them one after the other’, ‘Now
pick out some things which desire mystery’, ‘Now get interested in them’. This can be run
straight on through the Mystery to Know Scale which is: Mystery, Sex, Eatingness, Symbols,
Thinkingness, Effort, Emotion, Lookingness, and Knowingness, to give it in its most
complete form.
R2-40: CONCEIVING A STATIC THIS IS A HEAVY PROCESS. IT IS NOT
RECOMMENDED FOR CASES HAVING ANY REAL DIFFICULTY.
Here we use the discovery and principle of Ultimate Truth (see Summary of
Scientology).
If one has no prior postulate and makes a postulate, then that postulate cannot be a lie.
If one then makes a denying postulate second to this primary postulate, he then has
accomplished a lie.
A prime postulate on any subject cannot be a lie. A second postulate can be a lie. In
such a case, the second postulate permits the prime postulate to exist. But in such a case it is the
second postulate, the lie, which persists. All second postulates depend on prime postulates for
their force.
1. All evil depends upon a prime postulate of goodness if the evil is to persist.
2. The Satanists claim that Satan is God after He made the universe.
3. A hatred of a person depends for its only strength upon a love for that person prior to
the hatred. The hatred persists but only has strength from the love.
4. A man considers himself to be worthless. This state of mind, persisting, denotes that
he must have had a considerable opinion of himself before he felt worthless.
But beware of thinking that ‘all is good’ or ‘all is evil’. The force comes from prime
postulate, the state persisting from the second postulate.
EXAMPLE:
1. A doctor considers himself a good, charitable man, a wholly unselfish healer. On
examination we see the second postulate persists, so his goodness must be the second
postulate. It must have force from a prime postulate it denies and so we find this doctor entered
medicine because it had more chance of easy sex. Then he denied this to himself and argued he
did it from humanity. His pious mien ceases to persist and he is freed from this pose by
straight-wiring the prime postulate.
RULE:
Always straight-wire out a condition contradicting the condition which exists.
EXAMPLE:
1. We have a preclear with bad legs. We see that bad legs are persisting. Thus we know
that the forceful postulate is prior and opposite so we straight-wire out good legs.
2. A man is sick because of a jilt in love. We straight-wire out not the jilt, but the times
he loved the girl.
3. Our interiorized preclear is stuck, won’t exteriorize. We straight-wire the time he was
free and so discharge the stuck (the second) postulate, and thus exteriorize him.
RULE:
That which is closer to an ultimate truth (the Static) gives power to that which
contradicts it.
The process, and a vicious one it is, contains only the command, repeated over and
over, ‘Conceive a thetan’.
49.Caution: this is a long process. The auditor may have to remedy the havingness of the
preclear. (Do not forget SOP 8-C Opening Procedure if the preclear bogs.)
The ‘top buttons’ of the Chart of Attitudes (see Scientology 8-8008) are the main
qualities of a Static. A Static has no quantity: it does have quality and consideration.
R2-41: VIA VIA
VIA VIA is the curse word for existence. VIA means a relay point in a communication
line. To talk via a body, to get energy via eating alike are communication by-routes.
We are trying to string, in a preclear, a straight line from Cause to Effect. The reasons
we cannot are all via’s or complete stops. Enough vias make a stop. A stop is made out of
vias.
There is no real reason one should go into the past to straighten the present. There is no
time but postulated time. Thus it is all present. Why not, then, postulate the desired condition in
the present?
It is painful to do so, for the moment one does he tends to slip from the ideal to the first
lie. One slips because the first lie was TIME. Time persists because it is a lie deriving its force
from the absence of time in the static. Then forthright postulation of the static at first
restimulates time. When the time postulate restimulates the literal blackness of lies, somatics,
etc. come into view. All one has to do is endure these and repostulate the static. The reason
earlier efforts along this line failed lay in their restimulating the second postulate each time, the
lie, and then, not repostulating the static, mooning over the lie or the sign.
Recent efforts, such as Coue-ism, did not postulate the static, but validated time.
(‘Every day in every way I am getting better and better.’) Don’t postulate to become beautiful,
postulate current beauty. (‘I am beautiful.’) Thus postulating the static at first swings one into
Time and the second postulate, then finally the static itself occurs.
Remember: a static has no mass, wave-length, energy, location, or time. But it can
consider, and it has qualities. Those qualities are its basic definition plus the top buttons of the
Chart of Attitudes, plus beauty.
A solution would be something which solves the problem. Thus the As-is-ness is the
problem is the solution for it would vanish the problem. Thus, in Scientology we have attained
an ultimate solution -- the static, and an ultimate truth -- the static. To work this clearly, the
auditor commands: ‘Get the idea of having infinite leisure’. When the preclear does, ‘Now get
it again’, ‘Get it again and better’, ‘Again’ and so forth, regardless of what somatics or locks
appear. He does this for at least fifteen minutes. Then, ‘Now get the idea of complete
freedom’. ‘Again.’ ‘Again’, for at least fifteen minutes. Then, ‘Get the idea of having total
ability’, for at least half an hour.
Now use this command but include in it the Chart of Attitudes and beauty: ‘Assume
complete ...’ ‘Again’, ‘Assume complete ... again’, ‘Again’.
The Chart of Attitude buttons are: SURVIVAL, RIGHTNESS, RESPONSIBILITY,
OWNERSHIP, MANKIND, DURATION, MOTION (as source), TRUTH, FAITH,
KNOWINGNESS, CAUSE, BEINGNESS, and BEAUTY. Do not do these briefly.
LET THE PRECLEAR EXPLAIN HOW THESE SEEM TO HIM BUT DON’T MIX
THIS WITH DESCRIPTION PROCESSING.
R2-42, R2-43 AND R2-44 ARE A PROCESSING GROUP
50.R2-42: PAN-DETERMINISM
Pan-Determinism is a new idea in Scientology. Its Validity is demonstrated by the fact
that it is a ‘five-star’ process. Pan-Determinism is the ability to regulate the considerations of
two or more identities, whether or not opposed. Previously our goal was the relatively limited
goal of Self-Determinism. It was for some time realized that this did not embrace the total
concept since Self-Determinism expresses in the main the First Dynamic. But the moment one
begins to consider the fact that the thetan is controlling the body, one sees that he is not dealing
with a person or identity with the First Dynamic but is dealing with the Third Dynamic. Thus
we have Self-Determinism as a misnomer. We see that survival is as successful as determinism
is stretched across the environment. In other words, up the Dynamics. Certainly where man is
concerned it is never a problem, then, of Self-Determinism, it is a problem of Pan-Determinism,
for here we have in one individual several items, each distinct, under control.
When a thetan came into full control of himself and his activities we would have, and only then
have, Self-Determinism. But a thetan, in his playing of the game, is attempting Pan-Determinism,
and is assuming Self-Determinism. His first goal might be said to be Pan-Determinism.
Under Pan-Determinism we have of course the problem of control. The
component parts of control are start, change and stop. Thus a person controlling something is
trying to start, change and stop that thing. Where he loses his ability to start and stop it he only
retains his ability to change it, and thus we have a low-level case trying desperately to change,
being unable to change, and very certainly being unable completely to start and stop. His last
effort is to change.
Any time you are addressing a preclear you are addressing something which is
attempting Pan-Determinism.Here is a thetan trying to control a body, an engram bank, and the
various symbiotes of the body, such as its possessions, vehicles, and servicing items.
In Pan-Determinism we are not concerned with either bad or good. We are only
concerned with the fact that a thetan is trying to control many identities, some of them opposed
to others, and that his inabilities in the past to control certain beingnesses have brought him to a
level of belief where he does not feel that he can control anything, and as a result we discover
him unable to because, thus unable to find himself or be at the source-end of a communication
line. Pan-Determinism is the direct reason why one becomes ‘buttered all over the universe’.
This effort toward Pan-Determinism is the monitoring point in all processing. The
discovery of Pan-Determinism was the difference between success and failure in many cases.
Under the heading of Pan-Determinism we discover such things as owning, protecting,
and hiding bodies. One declares the ownership of something so that he will be given the right
to control it. One protects something because he considers that something else is trying to
control it. One hides something because he is afraid something else may appear to control it.
An enormous variety of processes stem from Pan-Determinism. Here any and all of the
training of an auditor can exert itself. This is the common denominator and the one fast line
through to the upper ranges of the tone scale. There is a second line: that which is described in
R2-43, FIGHTING. Pan-Determinism is what one is fighting for. It is the ‘reason why’
behind existence.
The auditing commands for the running of Pan-Determinism are as follows: ‘What do
you feel you could control’, and ‘some more things’, and ‘some more things’.
One runs this so as to improve the considerations of the preclear. He can fully expect
the preclear to drop into very deep apathy on occasion, but the process carried forward
determinedly by the auditor and not ‘patty-caked’ or left off simply because the preclear is
having difficulty, will produce, all by itself, a considerable resurgence of case. R2-43 takes
care of most of the factors which are encountered as the reason why one does not feel one can
determine the course of something.
51.R2-43: FIGHTING
Basically this Universe is a game. The MEST universe pretends to be a universe of
peace. In order to become a universe of peace it is necessary to stop everything from fighting.
In order to have a game it is necessary to have opponents. If one has opponents there must be
fighting. This universe is organized to immobilize a thetan.
So eager is a thetan to have a game that he will adopt to himself all manner of liabilities
in order to have a parity with his opponents. One cannot have a game with people who are too
inferior in strength or cleverness. Thus one reduces his own strength and cleverness in order to
have a game.
As given in R2-42, PAN-DETERMINISM, one uses as his reason why he is fighting
the necessity of controlling something else. The effort to control is the ‘reason why’ for
fighting. Fighting itself is the game.
R2-42 and R2-43 are very close together in workability and between them worked one
against the other, back and forth, will lift the preclear up through the barriers of force. It could
be said that a preclear stops fighting when he considers that other forces or ideas or emotions
are too much for him. As given in the Philadelphia lecture series, one has to go up through
force before one can cease to use force. If one does not rise superior to force, then one is the
subject and slave of force.
Peace is only to be found at the high levels of the tone scale. Any effort to have peace
after one has become the victim of force and is afraid of force simply involves further struggle.
There is no peace below the level where one cannot fight. We are not here concerned with
moral values, we are only concerned with the workability of processes, and whereas it might
be said of Scientology that it is attempting to sell fighting and war, this would only be said by
those who were themselves badly defeated and afraid of force.
Here we have as well, automaticity and randomity. In order to have more attention to
control other things, one sets up the things he is already controlling as automatic. Having done
so he has given to them a determinism of their own, and having so given them their own
determinism they can, if he ceases thus to control them, attack him. Thus we have the machines
of a thetan. These machines work only so long as they are in control of the individual, and then
begin to work against the individual. Thus it is with the remainder of the universe. One only
fights those things which he has selected out as not under his control. Any thing which is not
under an individual’s control but which has taken the individual’s attention is likely to be an
identity used to fight.
The motto of this universe is ‘We must have a game’. Games consist of opponents, and
reasons to have a game, and things to have a game about. Reasons to have a game are summed
up under Pan-Determinism. Things to have a game about are summed up under Havingness.
The game is the thing. The wins and losses are not the thing. One loses every time one
wins, for he then has no game. Any cessation will bring about a change in the status of an
individual for he will then impose upon himself other penalties and liabilities and impose
reasons why upon others so as to create a new game.
Although it is antipathetic to most preclears, as you will discover by processing them, a
game is no more and no less than fighting an opposition.
One falls out of having a game when one begins to believe that the forces being used
against him, or the ideas being used against him, or the emotions being used against him, are
too great to oppose. Once he has this idea he can then be subjected to other forces.
As all forces, emotions, and efforts in general can be categorized under Considerations
to have a consideration about a force has greater actuality than having the force itself. Changing
one’s mind about force is senior to changing force.
52.It must be realized that an individual who has drawn away from force has also drawn
away from the material of which his engram bank is made. People on whom engrams collapse
are people who have become afraid of force. This is best approached, not by using work or
other factors, but by directly approaching the problem of games and running fighting only.
It will be discovered that most individuals are involved with fighting themselves. After
all, an individual is a Third, not a First Dynamic. The body, the engram bank, the thetan, his
machines form four items which can be at war, one with another, and when an individual has
an insufficiency of fighting out in his environment he will begin to fight with himself. The
condition of most preclears who come to an auditor is this. One of the ways to handle this is
with the auditing command: ‘Point out some things in the environment which are fighting
themselves’. This run for an hour or two out where the preclear can actually see things and
point them out will key out most of the engram bank with which he is in conflict. He will
recognize fully and clearly very shortly after he has started on this process that he is fighting
himself.
In view of the fact that there is a scarcity of fighting imposed by police, mores, and the
motto Peace! Peace! Peace! of this universe, you will discover that you have to start, and run
for a very long time, the factor of wasting. Thus, the first entrance to this problem could be
wasting fighting. One would do this in brackets with the following auditing commands:
‘Waste some fighting’, and when the comm-lag is flat on this, ‘Have somebody else waste
fighting’, ‘Waste some fighting’, ‘Have somebody else waste fighting’. It will be discovered
that the preclear will do this for many hours of processing, all with a betterment of his case,
before he actually gets up to the point where he can touch the next level of this process, which
is accepting fighting. However, one does not at this stage run accepting fighting. The next part
of this process is done with the following auditing commands: ‘Waste some opponents’,
‘Have somebody else waste some opponents’.
After the preclear can handle this without any appreciable comm-lag, one then goes to
the next part of this process: ‘Waste some liabilities’, ‘Have somebody else waste some
liabilities’, ‘Waste some liabilities’, ‘Have somebody else waste some liabilities’. And this,
too, will have to be run for a long time until the individual has flattened his communication lag.
Having handled the subject of fighting directly, opponents and liabilities, one can then
go on to accepting, but one does this only when the communication lag on wasting of fighting,
opponents, and liabilities has been done. One uses accepting in this case by remedying
Havingness. ‘Mock up something you could fight’, ‘Pull it into you’, ‘Mock up something else
you could fight’, ‘Pull it into you’. Even though the mock-up is invisible or black it is still
done. If you are having the individual point out things he could fight in the environment itself,
do not be surprised at this stage if he simply pulls out of his body as a thetan and occupies the
area of that which he thinks he could fight. One follows this with: ‘Mock up an opponent’,
‘Pull it into you’, ‘Mock up another opponent’, ‘Pull it into you’. One follows this with: ‘Mock
up a liability’, ‘Pull it into you’, ‘Mock up another liability’, ‘Pull it into you’.
You should run fighting in conjunction with Pan-Determinism and the process ‘Must
and Must Not Happen’. In other words do not run R2-43 without also running interspersed
with it R2-42 and R2-44. These three processes work together. Any time a communication lag
is fairly flat on any one of these, you should shift to either of the other two. Remember, R2-
42, R2-43, and R2-44 work together interspersed, and make, themselves, a process. If you
have a preclear out in the open you can have him point out things in the environment that he
could fight. Just as, if you have him out in the open you can have him point out things he
wouldn’t mind controlling, and in the case of R2-44, things that he wouldn’t mind having
happen, or not happen, again.
‘What would it be safe to fight’, until the comm-lag is flat. ‘What would others find it
safe to fight’, ‘What would it be safe to fight’, ‘What would others find it safe to fight’, in a
continuation of Fighting as a process. ‘What thoughts would it be safe for you to fight’, ‘What
thoughts would it be safe for others to fight’, run back and forth many times until the comm-lag
53.is flat. ‘What emotions would it be safe for you to fight’, ‘What emotions would it be safe for
others to fight’, run back and forth until the comm-lag is flat. ‘What efforts would it be safe to
fight’, ‘What efforts would others consider it safe to fight’, run back and forth until the comm-lag
is flat. ‘What imaginings would it be safe to fight’, ‘What imaginings would others
consider it safe to fight. ‘Indicate some things which are fighting.’ ‘Spot all the spots where
you had to stop fighting them.’ ‘Spot all the spots where you won’, is excellent since either a
win or a lose is a ‘stop fighting’ and therefore a loss of opponents. You will find many
preclears hung up in past moments of victory. This is only because they lost their opponents at
that moment, and the loss stuck them on the track by bringing about motionlessness. ‘What
would you need to fight things’, ‘What would others need to fight things’.
If you have the preclear out in the open where there are lots of people, a very good
method of processing, have him place into these people unknown to them the preclear’s own
attitudes about fighting. Take one attitude and have him place it in several people, another of the
preclear’s attitudes about fighting and have him place it in many more people, and you will
discover considerable changes take place in the preclear.
‘What mechanisms could you use to continue fighting’, is another fine process. ‘What
changes could you make and still fight’, is yet another interesting process. ‘Describe some
fighting that would interest you’, is another facet of this process. The key process to alter
behavior is, ‘Invent some things you could fight’, ‘Invent some things that could fight you’.
R2-44: MUST AND MUST NOT HAPPEN
A preclear is stuck on the track where motionlessness occurs. One of the reasons he has
used to fight was to make something happen or to keep something from happening. Thus it is
of interest in the case to undo these stuck points in the preclear. There are many ways these
could be undone, but there is apparently only one way that is actually effective. This is done
with the following commands. ‘Tell me some things you wouldn’t want to have happen again’,
‘Tell me some things you would like to have happen again’. The preclear will get, in
accordance with these commands, various recalls, incidents, facsimiles, or environmental
situations, or future fears or hopes, and may be steered more directly into these. I first
discovered this process by running concepts, but in the running of concepts it has a very
limited workability. By pointing out live or imaginary situations great workability is achieved.
The auditor must be very careful to do this process long enough so as not to leave the preclear
hung up in an incident.
This is the basic key of time.
R2-45: AN ENORMOUSLY EFFECTIVE PROCESS FOR EXTERIORIZATION
BUT ITS USE IS FROWNED UPON BY THIS SOCIETY AT THIS TIME
R2-46, R2-47 AND R2-48 ARE A PROCESSING GROUP
R2-46: OTHER PEOPLE
Here is one of the more curious and one of the more swiftly workable processes. An
auditor may find himself reluctant to use this process, but experiment has demonstrated that it
did not bring harm to other people. This is one of the fastest ways of getting rid of a
psychosomatic known in Scientology. It is practically the only method known to get rid of the
Unknowns in the bank. It is a direct environmental process utilizing actual, visible, other
people. To run this process one must be in a heavily populated area where people are on the
street, walking about, sitting down or otherwise directly visible to the preclear. The process is
not run in mock-ups. This process has been known to get rid of heavy chronic somatics in a
few minutes.
54.The auditor takes the preclear into a railroad station or a park, or has him sit in a car on
a heavily used street and says to him ‘What do you think is wrong with you?’ He has the
preclear name some specific thing, and having named it, the auditor then says ‘All right, pick
out one of these people, and have that thing wrong with that person’, and when the preclear has
done so, ‘Now pick out another person and have this same thing wrong with that person’. The
auditor continues to have the preclear place into these people this thing which is wrong With the
preclear only so long as the item is wrong with the preclear, for this is a very rapid process and
a very rapid change takes place.
Any concept or idea of any kind can be utilized in this process. The auditor can pick out
obvious things the preclear has, and have the preclear find these things wrong with other
people around.
This also works if the auditor has the preclear find each person, one after the other
which he actually sees during the process, perfect. In other words, the auditor can say,
‘Postulate perfection into that person’, ‘Now postulate perfection into that one’. This is mixing
OTHER PEOPLE with CONCEIVING A STATIC, but for that matter almost any process in
Scientology can be employed in this fashion.
One of the very effective ways of using this process, OTHER PEOPLE, is to have the
preclear place into them ‘lostness’, or stupidity, inability to locate themselves, and, in short, all
the factors making up Unknown as covered in R2-52.
Blackness, inability to get mock-ups, and other Scientological liabilities can also be
placed into people in this fashion.
It is interesting to note that the preclear, being incapable along the lines of energy and
postulates only very rarely gets through to anybody with this postulation, for the preclear is too
‘weak’ to cause such effects. However, he should do this with great sincerity and with full
belief that he is doing it. After a preclear has exteriorized, it is interesting to note that he still
does not have this same effect upon these people. But postulating such items actually does
bring about the condition.
R2-47: BODY DIFFERENTIATION
‘This process is done in the same manner as R2-46 R2-46, R2-47, and R2-48 being a
group of processes.
One has the preclear note the differences between himself and the bodies of the people
he can see in his immediate environment. This process is done in a park or a railroad station or
on the street, seated in a car. The auditing command is: ‘Point out a difference between that
person’s body and yours’. This command is used over and over.
R2-48: SEPARATENESS
This is a key process attacking individuation. In his effort to control, a thetan spreads
himself further and further from the universe, and in his failures to control, withdraws from
things he has attempted to control but leaves himself connected with them in terms of ‘dead
energy’. Thus we get the manifestation ‘buttered all over the universe’.
This was the process which told me that we are not natively sprung from one ‘common
body of theta’. If you run Separateness, accentuating the difference in unity of a thetan from
other thetans and things and spaces, he continues to gain in tone. If you run this process in
reverse, how he is the same as, or is connected to various items, he continues to dwindle in
tone. By handling this latter process one can press a thetan down into the rock-bottom state of
aberration. We have long known that differentiation was the keynote of sanity, and that
55.identification was the basis of aberration. This fact is utilized in processing by running
separateness.
It can be concluded that the thetan is an individual separate from every other thetan and
that he has never been part of any other thetan. There are many ‘phony’ incidents implanted on
the track whereby an individual is made to feel that he is a result of explosion having occurred
to a larger body. He is also made to feel that he was at one time ‘whole’ and is now only a
splinter of himself. This is only an effort to reduce him. He has always been himself, he will
always be himself, down to a time when he is entirely identified with this universe, at which
time he would no longer be himself simply because he would no longer be conscious.
It seems that the only aberration can occur by enforcing Basic Truth. Here we discover
that the individual, being separate, is then forced to be separate, and so develops a complex of
‘the only one’ and tries to fend off the rest of the universe from himself and finally merges with
it with his impossibility of fending it off. All you have to do is accentuate truth and force it
home as another determinism in order to create an aberration. There is some basic truth, then,
in whatever is wrong with a thetan, and of course the basic wrongness is that he is not a static.
Separateness is best run by having the preclear out in an open place inhabited by a great
many people, as in R2-46 and R2-47.
The auditing command is: ‘Point out some things from which you are separate’, ‘Point
out some more things from which you are separate’, ‘Point out some more things, from which
you are separate’.
You might believe that there might be some value in having him point out some things
from which he is not separate in order to ‘As-is’ his connections to things. However, if you
started this process on having him find things from which he is not separate, you will very
quickly discover that your preclear is deteriorating in tone and that he does not resurge. This is
a one-direction process, having him point out things from which he is separate.
It should occur to you that, as we learn in R2-43, a thetan desires lots of opponents. Of
course the more separateness that he discovers the more opponents he can have, and the more
fighting he can see before him. This makes him happy. By conceiving himself identified with
an enormous number of things, he is, of course, rendered very scarce in opponents, and this
makes him unhappy, and makes him choose out only things which he could then fight without
being challenged, such as his engram bank or his body or his own machinery.
The basic reason a thetan conceives a great many remote viewpoints is to have a
separateness from himself. A thetan can actually be separate from himself as a remote
viewpoint and choose out himself, a thetan, as his opponent. Many a person who is thoroughly
interiorized is being the body so he can fight himself, a thetan. This is also inverted. When I
was making some of these basic discoveries I was puzzled to encounter the fact that in many
preclears, the preclear was entirely sold on the fact that he was attacking a demon which was
attacking his body. He would analytically conceive himself to be a thetan, but actually was
being the body, and as the body and a remote viewpoint in it, was attacking a theta body which
actually contained himself a thetan. This complexity came about when he was not even
permitted to fight the body.
As the totality of mis-emotion and weakness is exhibited solely when a thetan lacks
opponents and feels he cannot have a fight, you will discover, in running separateness, that
many mis-emotions, weaknesses, and so forth rise to the surface.
This is a relatively long process by itself, but it should be done in conjunction with R2-
46 and R2-47. Remember that the preclear should be absolutely certain that he is separate from
the item. Do not take any maybes.
56.R2-49: DEI SCALE
The scale of Desire-Enforce-Inhibit is repeated over and over in that order as we go
down the tone scale, and is therefore repeated in reverse order as we find a preclear rising. In
running almost any process it will be discovered that what the preclear is currently desiring will
shortly be inhibited by the preclear, and what is being inhibited will shortly be enforced by the
preclear, and what is being enforced by the preclear will shortly be desired by the preclear, and
this in turn will again be inhibited by the preclear, and so forth.
Step IV of SOP 8 of Expanded GITA gives a great many items which are useful in
raising tone. The number of items which produce the greatest effect when used as prescribed
in Step IV of SOP 8, given in this book, follow: FIGHTING, SELF-DETERMINISM,
ENGRAMS, HEALTH, SANITY, PEACE, EVIL, PRESENT TIME, IMAGINATION, and
CONTROL.
Using any one of the above fitted into the place of the blank in those auditing
commands, one runs the DEI Scale in this fashion: ‘Waste some fighting’, ‘Have somebody
else waste some fighting’. This is done until the communication lag is flat. Then: ‘Mock up
and pull in some fighting’. ‘Waste some ...’, ‘Have somebody else waste some ...’, and so
forth until the communication lag has been levelled. ‘Mock up and pull in some ...’, ‘Mock up
and pull in some ...’, ‘Mock up and pull in some ...’, again until the preclear has no
communication lag.
‘Desire some ...’, ‘Have somebody else desire some ...’. The DEI Scale, then, is
approximated in processing by Waste, for Inhibit Accept, for Enforce and simply the idea for
Desire.
There are many other factors which could be utilized in this process, and which have
been utilized in this process, such as problems, healthy bodies, and so forth, but these are not
as effective as the above-given list, which is the choice list of all the other factors which could
be utilized.
Another list can be used with considerable effectiveness, and this is the Know to
Mystery scale. One would then have the preclear waste, accept, and desire, in that order, the
following items in this order: MYSTERIES, PROBLEMS, SEX, EATING, SYMBOLS,
EFFORT, EMOTION, VISION, HEARING, and THOUGHT.
It is interesting to note that a person who has sonic shut-off is hanging on to silence.
One can have him waste, accept, and desire sonic and vision, pain and unconsciousness.
By running pain with the DEI scale one will discover that the thetan actually desires
pain: any sensation is better than no sensation.
R2-50: CHANGING MINDS
The basic process of a thetan is simply getting him to change his mind. Most thetans fall
below the level of mechanics. They have to be brought up to a point where they are not being
handled by mechanics before they can simply change their considerations. If changing minds
worked on any thetan it would then be the only process in Scientology, but it does not work on
thetans who are interiorized since they are being other things than themselves, and when they
start to change their minds they are simply changing something else.
When you have a thetan exteriorized, all you have to do is ask him to change his mind,
and, unless he is still very badly burdened by mechanical considerations with which he has so
thoroughly agreed that he cannot immediately change his mind, he will do so.
57.This process can be used on a non-exteriorized thetan, however, and on those who are
uneasily exteriorized, by having them stand in one place with an idea that they have to appear
there, and then change their minds, and disappear there. Or simply have them stand in one
place until they change their mind, and then go to another place and change their mind, and go
to another place and change their mind. This is done, actually, by moving the body around, as
most auditing these days is done.
The auditing commands for this would be ‘Walk over to this spot’ (indicating a spot to
the preclear), ‘Now decide you have to appear there’, ‘Now change your mind and decide you
have to disappear there’, ‘Now change your mind and decide you have to appear there’, and so
on.
This can also be worked into opening procedures by having a preclear select a spot,
then change his mind about the spot, select another spot, change his mind about that spot and
select another spot, until he knows that he, himself, is changing his mind.
When exteriorized, the thetan can change his mind very easily on any subject simply
when told to do so. Very often he does not realize that he can change the factors of his life
around simply by changing his mind, and so has to be asked to do so by the auditor.
A note of warning: this does not work on interiorized preclears with any great value.
R2-51: RISING SCALE PROCESSING
This is one of the older processes of Scientology. It consists of the individual being
asked to get whatever idea he can about the buttons of the chart of attitudes and then change his
ideas upwards. Using this process, the entire endocrine system of the preclear has been altered
for the better.
The auditing commands would be dependent upon the chart of attitudes. The buttons of
the chart of attitudes are: DEAD - SURVIVE, NOBODY - EVERYONE, DISTRUST - FAITH,
LOSE - WIN, RIGHT - WRONG, NEVER - ALWAYS, I KNOW NOT - I KNOW, STOP -START,
NO RESPONSIBILITY - FULLY RESPONSIBLE, STOPPED - MOTION
SOURCE, FULL EFFECT - CAUSE, IDENTIFICATION - DIFFERENCE, OWNS
NOTHING - OWNS ALL, HALLUCINATION - TRUTH, I AM NOT - I AM, HAD -BEING.
The auditing commands involved in this process follow: ‘How close can you come to
trusting everybody? Now do you have that idea?’ and when the preclear has: ‘All right, shift
that idea as high as you can toward trust’. Do this many times with the preclear on one item of
the list before going on to the next.
R2-52: UNKNOWNS
One of the liabilities of Dianetics was that it took all the data off the bank and left on the
bank effort and unknown substances. Efforts and unknowns were not as-ised.
One of the basic auditing commands of this is: ‘Give me some unknown incidents’.
The preclear, as he tries to do so, will immediately find known incidents turning up rapidly. He
is As-ising unknownness. One of the best ways of using unknownness is with a group of
separatenesses where the preclear is outside looking at other people. Have him get how much is
unknown to each one of these people with the following auditing command: ‘Now find a
person and put some unknowingness into him’, ‘Now find another person and put some
unknowingness into him’.
58.A variation of this is: ‘Put unknownness of location into a person’, ‘Now another
person’, and so on. The reason why location is used is because it is part of the, definition of
stupidity. One can also use time, with the following command: ‘Put some unknown times into
that person’, ‘Now put some unknown times into that person’, and so on.
Remember to always run the same auditing command over, and over, and over, until a
change has ceased to occur in the preclear.
R2-53: REPAIR. A FOUR-STAR PROCESS
It seems rather obvious that we should handle ‘repair’ as a process since that is what we
have been doing in Dianetics and Scientology. If a preclear can’t himself repair he gets some
help, a doctor, a minister. If the auditor can’t repair, he won’t run processes to make the
preclear well. Granting of beingness has ‘repair’ as a major part of its sphere.
The cycle of action of the MEST universe for this process could be: CREATE -REPAIR
(CHANGE) - DETERIORATE (CHANGE) - DESTROY.
The auditing commands for this process are: ‘What wouldn’t you mind repairing?’
‘What wouldn’t you mind letting others repair?’ ‘What would you mind repairing?’ ‘What
would you mind others repairing?’ ‘What don’t you know how to repair?’ ‘What don’t others
know how to repair?’
The above is the main process and should be heavily stressed. The comm-lags are very
long and the process must not be briefly run. Finish one command, reducing all lag by many
times using it, get the question answered every time. Use for hours.
Other indicated questions are run by substituting the following for ‘repair’ in the above
question form: CREATE, (REPAIR) CHANGE, DETERIORATE, DESTROY, or START,
(CHANGE) and STOP, the factors of control.
A specific group of processes which have been discovered to do a great deal for
preclears consist of R2-53 REPAIR, followed by R2-44 MUST AND MUST NOT HAPPEN,
followed by R2-43 FIGHTING, followed by R2-42 PAN-DETERMINISM. This series, run
with the auditing commands as given is enormously effective. A complete audit of a preclear in
very bad condition could follow this plan: R2-16 OPENING PROCEDURE OF 8-C for several
hours R2-17 OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION for several hours R2-20 USE OF
PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS, using the commands given in the last paragraph of that
section then, R2-53 REPAIR R2-44 MUST AND MUST NOT HAPPEN R2-43 FIGHTING
R2-42 PAN-DETERMINISM R2-39 INTEREST, as given in its last paragraphs R2-54
FLOWS R2-55 IMPORTANCE. Used in this exact order, continuous and very wonderful
changes can be made to occur in a preclear even though he began the process as entirely
psychotic. Many such routes could be designed, but this particular one happens to have been
tested in this order on preclears, and found workable.
R2-54: FLOWS
The processing of flows has several times been tested in Scientology, and each time it
has been discovered that there were many preclears who could not handle them with the
processes which have already been advanced. The static and the object were, therefore,
concentrated upon and flows were avoided. However, R2-54 overcomes this past difficulty.
This is a very splendid way to make a preclear change his considerations, but it should be run
long enough to take away the somatics which it turns on, for the somatics which R2-54 turns
on can be severe.
59.The process is extremely simple to run, but must, like all other processes here, be run
exactly as given to produce the desired result. It consists of having the preclear point out things
which inhibit, enforce, and desire flows.
The auditing commands would be as follows: ‘Look around you and point out some
things, one after the other, which inhibit flows’, ‘Now point out some more’, ‘Now point out
some more’, then ‘Look around you and point out some things which enforce flows’, ‘Now
point out some more’, ‘Now point out some more’, ‘Now look around you and indicate some
things which desire flows’, ‘Now point out some more’, ‘Now point out some more’, ‘Now
look around you and point out some things which inhibit flows’, ‘Now point out some more’,
‘Now point out some more’, and so on.
If the preclear is indicating people, he will discover with some rapidity that people are
enforcing and inhibiting flows. He will discover also that speech is a flow. He will discover
also that the universe is built of these flows. The preclear should be permitted to discover these
things for himself. He will find, for instance, that blackness forces a flow.
If a preclear wishes to know what a flow is, point out to him that a light bulb is flowing
light waves out into the room, and that an object is reflecting them.
This process is, of course, worked best as part of the group where the preclear is taken
outside and made to point out people and actually belongs with that group. This is definitely a
four-star process.
R2-55: IMPORTANCE. A FIVE-STAR PROCESS
It might be a very bad thing to run this process immediately and at once upon a preclear,
and an auditor should never begin with such a process on a case. Auditors, today, begin only
with Opening procedure of 8-C and follow that with Opening Procedure by Duplication, and
ordinarily follow that with Problems and Solutions, and only then go off into processes as
difficult as this process.
Although this is a difficult process it is not difficult to do. It is difficult because it
produces such rapid change upon the preclear that he is liable to be left in some state where he
considers all things unimportant and is made by the process to be out of balance with the
universe, and his life, and his environment, and if it were run on a preclear who was having a
difficult time without first running Opening Procedure of 8-C and Opening Procedure by
Duplication, he would of course have a tendency to stop being audited for he would be plunged
into the unimportance of everything including auditing.
The keynote of importance is simply this: anything which is important is solid or big,
and the more important a person believes himself to be the bigger he is liable to get, or the more
important a person believes something to be, the more solid he is liable to make it. Anybody
who believes that minds are important is liable to make them solid, hence we immediately get
the type of bank which some people have, with their solid facsimiles, and in consequence
masses and ridges.
We began to hit this a number of years ago when we discovered that whatever we
validated became more prominent. I did not at that time know why this was, and have now
discovered that it is because things, which are considered important, become more solid.
This could also be called games processing, for we are handling here the most
important part of importance: the fact that in order to have a game there must be something
important, to defend, to have, to attack. There is no game unless one has some item which is
important, for it would not be visible to anyone but himself if it were not solid. Important and
solid can be considered to be for our purposes synonyms.
60.The auditing commands which run this are very simple and are pursued for some time
without change of command. First: ‘Tell me some things which are important’, ‘Tell me some
more things which are important’, ‘Tell me some things which are important to other people’,
‘Tell me some more things which are important to other people’, back and forth on this. Then:
‘Point out some things which are important’, ‘Point out some more things which are
important’, ‘Point out some things which other people consider important’, ‘Point out some
more things which other people consider important’.
Then: ‘Tell me some things which are unimportant’, ‘Tell me some more things which
are unimportant’, ‘Tell me some things which are unimportant to other people’, ‘Tell me some
more things which are unimportant to other people’, back and forth on this.
Then: ‘Point out some things which are unimportant’, ‘Point out some more things
which are unimportant’, ‘Point out some things which other people consider unimportant’,
‘Point out some more things which other people consider unimportant’.
In view of the fact that each consideration that something is important tends to add
mass, and each consideration that something is unimportant tends to detract mass, and in view
of the fact that the consideration that something is important is the second postulate to the truth
that it was unimportant, we discover the mechanism which causes minds to form large masses
such as facsimiles and engrams. At first one considered his mind unimportant, then he
considered it important, and then again unimportant, and then again important, and this cyclic
activity brings into existence the mind as mass, which is to say creates the reactive mind. We
occasionally discover people who are having considerable difficulty, and the wide-open case,
and the occluded case, with considerable energy mass which they are calling their mind. They
do their thinking by facsimiles, they do their behaving at the orders of the facsimile. This can
be traced immediately to the consideration that the mind is important, unimportant, important,
unimportant, important, unimportant in a repeating cycle.
An indicated process to remedy this condition would be: ‘Spot some spots’, ‘Spot some
more’, et cetera. And ‘Spot some spots where others thought the mind was unimportant’, ‘Spot
some more such spots’, and so forth. ‘Spot some spots where you thought the mind was
important’, ‘Spot some more such spots’, and so forth. ‘Spot some spots where others thought
the mind was important’, et cetera. This sequence of commands should be run, each one, until
the communication lag is flat and then, as in all such sequences in this book, should be gone
through again several times.
A vital, if somewhat murderous process, very important to be run on Scientologists is
‘Spot some spots where you thought thought was unimportant’, ‘Some more’, etc. ‘Spot some
spots where others thought thought was unimportant’, etc. ‘Spot some spots where you
thought thought was important’, etc. ‘Spot some spots where others thought thought was
important’, etc. This crosses importance with conceiving a static.
Another indicated question is ‘What important things could you be?’, ‘Give me some
more important things you can be’. And then: ‘Give me some more important things you could
do, as a thetan’, ‘Give me some more important things you could do as a thetan’.
A general formula on importance would be to spot spots where the preclear considered
everything on the Mystery to Know scale important, emphasizing words, sounds, sights,
blackness and energy. By running this process you can expect a considerable regain of
education on the part of the preclear. Almost all education has been hammered into the preclear
as a terribly important activity. Actually it will be as much use to him as it is considered
casually. This accounts, in some measure for the tremendous difference in the attitude toward
education of one trained by casual and interested tutors and one trained between the millstones
of the public school system, with all the horrors of the examination for passing, and accounts
for the complete failure on the part of universities to educate into existence a leadership class.
The secret lies entirely in the fact that education is as effective as it is pleasant, unhurried,
casual, and is as ineffective as it is stressed to be important. For example, giving arithmetic the
61.category of something terribly important is to bring the student at length into possession of a
solid lump of energy which, utterly useless to him, will lie there as ‘arithmetic’. This also
accounts for the failure of the child genius. Generally his parents consider his career so
important that eventually his piano playing or painting will be an energy mass. He will be as
good as, and as effective as he can change his considerations, and one does not easily change
his considerations in the face of such energy masses. Auditors have often wondered at the
resistance of the preclear toward turning on sonic and visio and at the persistence of blackness.
Here again we have a problem of importance. The deafer a person becomes, or the leas sonic a
person has, the more he tends to believe it is important for him to have this attribute, and of
course, the less he has it, for the more solid it gets. Solidity could be said to be stupidity. Here,
also we have the tremendous stress, as given in BOOK ONE, on words. The more important
instructions are, the more important words are. The more important speech becomes, as in
General Semantics, the more buried, and therefore the more effective, words become in the
reactive bank. If you were to choose a single process out of importance, the one which would
probably pay off best would be one which wasted words, accepted them, and desired them in
brackets, and then which caused the preclear to spot all the spots where words were considered
unimportant, and words were considered important for himself and for others.
We are looking at the Master Trick. A person is as well-off as he is free, and lacking in
uncontrolled energy deposits. But these gather to the degree that certain facets of existence are
stressed as important.
R2-56: GAMES PROCESSING
Games Processing 1954 is quite different than its predecessors but the fundamentals are
the same in Scientology as they have been always. The highest activity, action, or ambition is
‘to have a game’. A game requires that one create or have an opponent. The whole series
centering around fighting is actually the lower range of Games Processing, which accounts for
its tremendous effectiveness.
Processing games directly, the first indicated process would be one taken from
Description Processing which would as-is certain undesirable characteristics. This would be
done with the command, ‘Give me some games which are no fun’, ‘Give me some more games
which are no fun’, ‘Give me some more games which are no fun’, until the apathy and
antagonism toward games in general has been to a marked degree ‘as-ised’.
As an opponent is an essential part of games, the processing of opponents, in general,
produces interesting results in a case. We could simply improve the considerations of the
preclear with regard to opponents by asking him ‘What sort of opponents could you have’, and
carrying this forward until all communication lag is gone. Or, one could have the preclear
waste, accept and desire opponents, where the accepting is done by having him mock up an
opponent and remedying his havingness for it.
Another interesting process which produces excellent results is ‘Name some unromantic
roles’, ‘Name some more unromantic roles’, and so forth. ‘Name some romantic roles’, ‘Name
some more romantic roles’, and so forth. ‘Name some unromantic roles’. ‘Name some more
unromantic roles’, and so on back and forth until the preclear has regained the ability to imagine
some roles. Actually he has been given roles by the motion pictures and television, and his
propaganda textbooks, until he will only accept a role which is generally approved by this
society as represented in fiction. This could be said to be an intentionally fictionalized society.
Marriages quite often go to pieces simply because Jim Jones and Mary Smith did not get
married. Jim Jones, posing as Alan Ladd, marries Mary Smith posing as Lana Turner, and a
fictional Alan Ladd married to a fictional Lana Turner is going to be disappointed. Whereas,
there is no reason under the sun why Jim Jones shouldn’t be a good and interesting guy doing
an interesting role, and why Mary Smith should not be doing a role herself, as herself, for
people are interesting to the degree that they can postulate and act into existence the roles
required of them in life. The Bard of Stratford-on-Avon said that ‘All the world’s a stage’, but
62.didn’t give us the process by which we could be players. Your preclear has been audience, and
this process boots him out of being audience into being a player, which is more or less what the
auditor is trying to do with a preclear. He can’t have any games where everybody is being an
audience and nobody is playing. The scarcity of roles which a person can actually occupy in
this society is such that we commonly discover a preclear continuing to act out any role which
he has been given in some school play which he found romantic. I know several preclears
whose total difficulty is that they have never ceased to be the gangster they did so well in the
High School production of ‘Officer 666’, or the prostitute they did so excellently in the College
Drama Club production of ‘Rain’.
A not recommended and rather dead-end process would be involved in asking the
preclear for things worth fighting for, in that he can only postulate things worth fighting for,
and that he is so far down the scale on this, the process is a difficult one but can be used.
A preclear quite commonly has play and work nicely and neatly separated. The
difference between play and work is that play is no fun and work is no fun in the common
parlance, until today we have only work. In view of the fact that effort is stupidity unless
understood, working at trying to play is the general difficulty with people. Quite often a
medical doctor will advise somebody to stop working so hard and start playing. The actual fact
of it is, an executive quite commonly has his work as his only play, and so the medical doctor
has consigned him to some hard work by telling him he has to play. Thus we have an
inversion. ‘What kind of a game could you have’, ‘Give me some more games you could
have’, is a useful process.
‘What would you have to be to have a game?’, ‘Some more things you would have to
be to have a game’, carried forward, interspersed with an actual description from the preclear of
each game he lists is very effective.
The following process ranks very high in effectiveness in all these procedures: ‘ What
kind of a game could you have involving ...?’ In asking this question the auditor points out
some object in the immediate environment and the preclear is made to describe what kind of a
game he could have with that object. The auditor then points out another object in the
environment and asks ‘What kind of a game could you have involving ...?’ It will soon be
borne home to the preclear that he has been trying to play games with the absence of
opponents, that he has hung on to most of the disasters that have happened to him in his life
because they meant the loss of opponents. Here we find the child who has been raised alone
dreaming up illusory opponents, and later on we discover him mocking up demons. Any time
you walk into an insane asylum and discover somebody involved with a battle with demons, or
who has a demon, or who has a guardian angel, or who has any one of these mythical
assistants or opponents, we are looking at somebody who found opponents so scarce that he
had to mock them up, and having mocked them up was unable to unmock them, for no new
opponent came along. The reason war mobilizes everyone into action and speeds up production
in a country is because a tangible opponent has been introduced, and people will accept tangible
opponents above illusory opponents. Man’s activity in fighting himself, thetan’s activities in
fighting themselves, all stem from this effort to play games in the absence of opponents. ‘What
kind of a game could you have involving ...?’ should be run until the preclear is cognizant of
everything he is doing with regard to opponents, without ever mentioning opponents to him.
R2-57: PROCESSES
The processing of Processes actually belongs to VIA. It is an intensely important thing
to do. Cells, trees, the whole of life is engaged in working processes. Normally they work
them unconsciously. One of the methods of straightening out this fixation on processes is to
have the preclear plan to do something very simple such as move an ash tray. Have him plan it
out in its entirety and then have him execute it exactly as he planned it. One does this many
times with many objects.
63.Another way of working this process is ‘Discover things in the environment which are
using processes’, and ‘Discover things in the environment for which you could invent
processes’.
R2-58: LOSS
The subject of loss is an entire study in itself. It is the subject of havingness as well.
Loss results in Degradation, Memory Failure, Blackness and what we used to call
‘stuck on the track’. So it is an important subject.
Loss itself can occur only when the consideration that one wants, needs, has to have,
has occurred first. When one loses something ‘important’ one supplants it by dragging in
energy deposits, facsimiles, on himself.
Here is the scale of substitutes acquired by reason of loss:
CUMULATIVE SPIRAL OF STOPPED TIME
OBJECT Loss of this
Substitute: OBJECT, owned
Loss of this Substitute: OBJECT, others
Loss of this
Substitute: MOCK-UP
Loss of this Substitute: MOCK-UP, owned
Loss of this
Substitute: MOCK-UP, others Loss of this
Substitute: PROBLEM
Loss of this
(a) Lost by solution (b) Lost by occlusion
Substitute: PROBLEM, owned Loss of this
Substitute: PROBLEMS, others Loss of this
Substitute: BLACKNESS. (‘Something in it?’) Loss of this
Substitute: BLACKNESS, owned Loss of this
Substitute: BLACKNESS, others Loss of this
Substitute: UNCONSCIOUSNESS Loss of this
Substitute: UNCONSCIOUSNESS, others Loss of this
Substitute: UNCONSCIOUSNESS, own Loss of this
Substitute: UNCONSCIOUSNESS
Loss of this Substitute: BLACKNESS, others
Loss of this Substitute: BLACKNESS, own
Loss of this
Substitute: BLACKNESS
Loss of this Substitute: PROBLEMS, others
Loss of this
Substitute: PROBLEM, owned Loss of this
Substitute: PROBLEM
Loss of this Substitute: MOCK-UP, others
Loss of this
Substitute: MOCK-UP, owned Loss of this
Substitute: MOCK-UP
Loss of this Substitute: OBJECT, others
Loss of this
HALLUCINATION
The Remedy of Havingness is a good process to overcome loss. However, loss is a
consideration.
64.The following processes remedy considerations involving havingness: ‘What assistance
do you need to survive?’, ‘What assistance do others need to survive?’
The most effective straight were on this is: ‘Name some important possessions’, ‘Some
more important possessions’, and so forth. ‘Name some things it is important not to have.’ As
we have havingness going down to ownership, then to protection, then to hiding, we have:
‘Name some things it is important to protect’, ‘Name some things it is important to hide’,
‘Name some things it is important to display (exhibit)’. These are lower level manifestations.
‘Important possessions’ will exteriorize.
R2-59: SURVIVAL
Whenever I have found a process unworkable in the past sixteen years, I have found
that the unworkable process avoided the dynamic principle of existence: SURVIVE. In other
words, it did not greatly matter how this principle was embroidered, if it was included in the
process or rationale, some workability resulted.
The dynamic principle of existence, Survive, and its application as the dynamics, is
easily the greatest discovery in Dianetics. Even when we add to it the remainder of the curve of
the cycle of action of the MEST universe, Create - Survive - Destroy, we find SURVIVE is the
potent truth in it.
So, Scientology or Dianetics processes, if we neglect SURVIVAL in our rationale,
become unworkable.
Survive has as its dichotomy, Succumb. When one is below 2.0 on the Tone Scale, all
survival looks evil to him. LIVE = EVIL in the succumbing case. To punish is to declare a
thing evil. To be evil is to refuse survival.
The dynamics are a breakdown of the dynamic Survival into eight parts. Each dynamic
in turn breaks down into many parts. Thus we have life. And these interplays of Survival are
life.
If your preclear is not clear, he is avoiding survival on one or many dynamics. His
considerations about Survival are his personality.
I tell you this lest we forget. Dianetics is a precision science. It stems from this study
and codification of Survival. Survival is the reason why.
Opening Procedure of 8-C (R2-16) works because the preclear, in spotting MEST, is
recognizing ‘Look! After all I’ve been through, I’ve survived’. Having a preclear spot, in a
crowd, people’s survival potential is great processing.
The auditing command ‘Point out some things in your surroundings which aren’t
surviving’, will spring grief or apathy. ‘Point out some things which are surviving’, is quite
potent. ‘Point out some unknown methods of surviving’, is one of those ‘fader’ questions -- he
can almost answer it for hours.
As a thetan is immortal, he cannot do other than survive. When he realizes this his game
may become ‘How can I succumb?’.
Survival has pay. That pay is the sensation of pleasure. This is acquired by Interest.
One tries to survive by being interesting. He demands of life that he be interested.
Thus, with the preclear in a crowd: ‘What could that person (auditor indicating one),
(have, do, be) that would be uninteresting?’ ‘What could that person (have, do, be) that would
be uninteresting to your (ally)?’. The preclear has as-ised all the interest from life and has left
65.intact uninteresting thing. When he tries to get interested anew, uninteresting ridges soak up his
interest. ‘What dreams, (goals) would you find uninteresting?’ is interest plus future =
survival.
A murderous auditing command while the preclear is outside looking at people and the
world is: ‘What dream could that person have that would not interest you?’, ‘That would not
interest your Mother (and other allies)?’. Interest of allies makes survival possible. Anything
which succeeds in interesting allies (orientation points and symbols) then may be a successful
mock-up for the preclear all his life. Syphilis, fatness, stupidity, may be ‘interesting’ enough to
allies to leave the preclear with them all his life. For an interested ally means future, and that is
Survival.
Get a list of all people he has known since birth, ask him for each one many times,
‘What would be interesting to (ally)?’ and you will find his service facsimile and the source of
his aberrations and psychosomatics. ‘What dynamic could you abandon?’ could be used on a
Scientologist.
The most basic question about bodies, being cellular organisms, is ‘What wouldn’t a
cell survive?’ ‘What else wouldn’t a cell survive?’ and so on. This is a very old but very potent
Dianetic process for the repair of bodies. Organs, body parts, and types of bodies can be
substituted for cells in the above question.
Remember, your goal is to improve the preclear’s Survival. If he thinks Survival is
evil, if to succumb is the only way he can get interest, your road will be eased by remembering
and processing the dynamic principle of existence -- Survive on all or any dynamic by any type
of process. And this is the rationale of Dianetics, which may be freely used by a Scientologist.
R2-60: THE HIDDEN COMMUNICATION
‘Spot some hidden knowingness’, is an auditing command which, pursued properly,
opens the gates to freedom.
In ‘Scientology 8-80’ and ‘Scientology 8-8008’ you will find a scale which begins at its
lowest rung with ‘hidden’. Above that is ‘protection’. Above that is ‘ownership’. I have
recently discovered that the DEI cycle and the above low scale join to make the scale read:
CURIOSITY
DESIRE
ENFORCEMENT
INHIBITION
OWNERSHIP
PROTECTION
HIDDEN
and I have discovered that the road upward through this scale is communication.
Knowingness condenses. Trying to know becomes the first level of communication.
This ‘looking to know’ condenses into ‘emoting to know’, which condenses into ‘effort to
know’, which in turn becomes ‘thinking to know’, which then condenses into ‘symbols to
know’ which, and this is the astonishing thing, becomes ‘eating to know’, which becomes
‘sexual activity to know’, which then turns into oblivion of knowing or ‘mystery’.
An energy particle is a condensed knowingness. Trying to discover or move one is an
action with the goal of knowingness.
Gravity, grim thought, becomes in the mind, and is, the effort to know, to pull in
knowingness. Other-determinism is only other knowingness.
66.The aspects of know are the common denominators of any scale in Scientology. When
knowingness is done by communication, we get emotion and effort particles changing position.
This struggle to know is not just me and thee working on Scientology and gone mad in
the process, it is life and all its manifestations including space, energy, matter and time. Each is
only a barrier to knowingness. A barrier is a barrier only in that it impedes knowingness.
Barriers do not exist for complete knowingness.
And what is there to know? Only that knowingness can vary. One has to invent things
to know for there is only knowingness, and knowingness has no data since a datum is an
invented, not a true, knowingness. The motto of any particle below knowingness is ‘Only
energy can tell you’.
We handle R2-60 HIDDEN KNOWINGNESS in this wise: ‘Spot some hidden
communications’, ‘And now spot some more hidden communications’, and so forth. We may
have to direct the preclear closely with, ‘Point to the spot’, ‘How far away does it seem?’, ‘Are
you spotting a hidden communication there?’ and such questions, meanwhile keeping good
ARC. He could be asked to spot specific kinds of hidden communications as with this
command: ‘Spot some hidden disease communications’, ‘Some hidden poisonous
communications’, or ‘Spot some hidden, but uninteresting communications’. But use the
question to flatten all communication lags before you change it.
If he goes into the past, let him. He’ll come back to the present. He’ll find his chronic
somatic and do many interesting things, including, perhaps, the data in the text of R2-60 here.
It is curious that the above ‘Spot some hidden communications’ does not seem to
require a remedy of havingness. But it will turn on many heavy ridges and somatics. Having
thoroughly worked ‘hidden communications’ you can now use this command: ‘Spot some
protected communications’, and when that is null, ‘Spot some owned communications’, and
after that has no communication lag, ‘Spot some inhibited (stopped) communications’. Then:
‘Spot some enforced communications’, and then, ‘Spot some desired communications’.
Now when all that is done, proceed as follows: ‘Spot some hidden knowingness’,
‘Are you spotting it in the physical universe? If so all right, point to it’, ‘How far away does it
seem?’, ‘Spot some more hidden knowingness’, and so on until after an hour or two (or six)
this command is comm-lag-flat.
Now start upscale as follows, making the preclear point and give the distance to the
spot (even when trillions of miles away): ‘Spot some protected knowingness’. And after many
times of that, then: ‘Spot some protected knowingness’, many times. Then: ‘Spot some owned
knowingness’, many times. Then: ‘Spot some inhibited knowingness’. Then: ‘Spot some
enforced knowingness’. Then: ‘Spot some desired knowingness’. Then: ‘Spot some
knowingness that people could be curious about’.
In R2-60 HIDDEN KNOWINGNESS, we can use the Know - Mystery scale:
‘Spot some mysteries’
‘Spot some hidden sex’
‘Spot some hidden eating’ ‘Spot some hidden symbols’
‘Spot some hidden thinking’ ‘Spot some hidden efforts’
‘Spot some hidden emotions’
‘Spot some hidden looking’ ‘Spot some hidden knowing’
Then: ‘Spot some protected mysteries’, ‘Spot some protected sex’, and so on.
You can, using the principles of hidden knowing and communication, combine any
other part of Scientology with them, and discover an excellent process. However, the first
commands given in R2-60 are the easiest to communicate and to use.
67.R2-61: GOOD AND EVIL
The factors of good and evil are the factors of accepting other determinism (good) and
accepting or giving blows (evil). That which co-operates is ‘good’. That which is punished is
‘evil’. This is the totality of consideration involved.
‘Good’ and ‘evil’ are third dynamic phenomena. But unlike most words one might
process, these have definite emotional connotations which, to the preclear, speak louder than
the words. These apply from Mystery up to Know.
Just as ‘good’ and ‘evil’ are the primary fixation of philosophy, so are they a primary
fixation in a preclear. So confused are they, in philosophy or in preclears, that an enormous
complexity results. Their resolution would resolve either philosophy or preclears.
The basic auditing commands to handle this extremely important process are: ‘Spot a
place where you decided to be good’, ‘Now spot a spot in this room’, ‘Spot the place again’,
‘Spot a spot in this room’, ‘Spot the spot again where you decided to be good’, ‘Spot a spot in
this room’, etc., until all comm-lag is gone for one distant spot where the decision was made to
be good. Then: ‘Now find another spot where you decided to be good’, ‘Spot a spot in this
room’, etc., and so on until many spots are ‘cleared’. Actually, the auditor wants the distant
spot to come into present time before he leaves it, but at least reduce comm-lag for each spot.
Now do exactly the same procedure using the following auditing command: ‘Spot a
place where another person decided to be good’, ‘Now spot a spot in this room’, alternating
back and forth until comm-lag is reduced.
The same is now done for ‘evil’ with this slight variation: ‘Spot a spot where you
decided you were evil’, ‘Spot a spot in this room’, ‘Spot a spot again where you decided you
were evil’, ‘Spot a spot in this room’, etc., as for ‘good’, picking out new single spots and
clearing each one as far as possible.
Then follow the same procedure with the command: ‘Spot a place where another person
decided he was evil’, ‘Spot a spot in this room’, etc., reducing comm-lag for each spot. Then:
‘Point out some unknown evils’, and ‘Point out what other people would find an unknown
evil’.
You may have to remedy havingness for the preclear for this is very destructive of
havingness. The preclear will come up with many considerations and changing ideas. Let him
voice them, but continue with the process. Don’t let your preclear leave the session with a
‘good’ or ‘evil’ spot uncleared or in restimulation.
He will become neither saint nor devil from running this he will become more capable
of good action.
R2-62: OVERT ACTS AND MOTIVATORS
One of the primary discoveries in Dianetics was the Overt Act - Motivator phenomenon.
An OVERT ACT is a harmful act performed against another. A MOTIVATOR is an overt act
performed against oneself by another.
If one receives a motivator, he then may consider himself licensed to perform an overt
act against the person who harmed him. When one commits an overt act without having
received a motivator, he attempts then to ‘mock-up’ or acquire a proper motivator or ‘justify’
his own harmful action.
68.An overt act delivered in the absence of a motivator we call an unmotivated act. A
justifier is the technical term we apply to the ‘mock-up’ or overt act demanded by a person
guilty of an unmotivated act.
In that a thetan cannot possibly, actually, be harmed, having no mass, wave-length, or
actual location, any harmful act he performs is an unmotivated act. Thus, a thetan basically
cannot have a motivator - overt act sequence and always has an unmotivated act justifier
sequence.
The ‘catch’ in this is the idea of ‘harmful’ (good and evil). An act must be considered
harmful or evil to be an overt act. To need a justifier a person must have believed his act to have
been harmful.
As the thetan cannot experience a motivator - overt act sequence, we have then the
dwindling spiral. He is always justifier hungry. Thus he punishes and restimulates himself.
Thus he is always complaining about what others do to him. Thus he is a problem to himself.
Only permit a thetan to get the idea that it is possible to harm others and you have, then,
the dwindling spiral.
Use of these data in auditing is simple and intensely profitable. For example, we have a
preclear who continually complains about his father, how mean his father was to him. This
means precisely that the actual facts of the past include many unmotivated acts against father by
the preclear, even though the preclear seems to recall no such acts by himself and many overt
acts against himself from father.
This is an excellent process to get a sudden result on a preclear. Ask him, straight wire,
for things he has done to his mother, father, any and all allies. Don’t let him run things they
have done to him.
‘Can you recall doing something to your (father, or other ally, or person)?’ is the only
auditing question.
Having him remedy his havingness with motivators is also a fair process.
R2-63: ACCEPT - REJECT
From acceptance we get a ten-star process. Whatever else you may do with a Preclear,
he must be brought to accept the physical universe and his own and other bodies, all in every
kind of condition. The way out is the way through. In Eastern practices, the goal was
abandonment, desertion. Scientology’s main difference from Eastern practices is this: it
accepts to free. And it frees. That which one cannot accept chains one. For instance, revulsion
to sex inclines at last to slavery to sex. A ruler’s motto could be ‘make them resist’, and his
people would become enslaved.
In 1870 we find capitalists resisting Marx. In 1933 we find Marx the basic text of U.S.
government. Resistance and restraint are the barbed-wire of this concentration camp. Accept the
barbed-wire and there is no camp.
On test this process exteriorizes the worst case if run long enough.
This process is important because it is one of the few (like R2-16) which does not have
alter-isness as its operative factor. This is not, then, an altering practice, confirming somatics
and aberrations, it is a freeing process.
That which one cannot accept he cannot as-is.
69.The commands of this process are as follows: ‘Find something about yourself which
you can accept’, ‘Something else’, ‘Find something else you can accept’, etc., etc., until there
is no comm-lag. Then: ‘Find something about yourself you can reject’, ‘Find something else
about yourself you can reject’, etc., etc., until there is no comm-lag. Then: ‘Find something in
this room you can accept’, ‘Something else’, ‘Find something else in this room you can
accept’, etc., etc., ‘Find something in this room you can reject’, ‘Find something else in this
room you can reject’, etc., etc. Then: ‘Find something about this universe you can accept’,
until the comm-lag is flat. Then: ‘Find something in this universe you can reject’.
Remember, this is not an altering process. It is a high value escape process. If your
preclear keeps putting conditions of change into everything before he can accept it, you must
persuade him to find things he can accept without changing them.
R2-64: TOUCHING
Most thetans are inside because they are afraid to touch the outaide. A baby is slapped
out of touching things by mamma and the MEST Universe. Some thetans are afraid that if they
touch MEST they’ll stick to it and so remain ‘safely’ inside.
There are two possible ways to run this. One is simply, ‘What are you willing to
touch?’, the other is, ‘As a thetan, what are you willing to touch?’ If the preclear ‘no savvy’
being a thetan, use the simpler form.
The command is, ‘As a thetan, what are you willing to touch?’, ‘What else are you
willing to touch?’, ‘What else are you willing to touch?’ etc., etc. Then: ‘What are you willing
to have touch you?’, ‘What else are you willing to have touch you?’
The mind can change without bringing alter-isness into play. Changing the mind is the
only possible way to improve without liability. This process alters only the mind. This is a very
valuable process. Eight stars.
R2-65: ALTERATION
As any energy or space condition survives only because it has been and is being altered,
the primary unmotivated act would be changing the condition of energy, space, and objects.
The mind can change without liability. When a mind changes energy or space we get a
persistence of that energy or space. As persistence or survival is good and bad only to those
who desire to succumb, we do not see in alteration of energy or space, any crime. But when
we alter only ‘bad’ conditions of space and energy we make the ‘bad conditions’ persist. Hence
it would be of value to a case to at least straight wire out some of the times when he attempted
to alter energy, spaces, or bodies of people. (To an auditor who works to exteriorize a preclear
and change his mind, there is small liability and great personal advance. To an auditor who
works only to change the body, the ridges, the somatics, there is failure, fixation of condition
in the preclear, and restimulation occurs. Successful auditing of the thetan actually improves
the auditor.) Failure is the biggest lock on alter-isness of course.
The preclear who is obsessively trying to change himself by self-auditing or whatever
means, has failed many times to effect a change in the condition of this universe or in the
bodies of others, or has the space and energy of this universe as a stable constant.
The commands are: ‘Can you recall a time when you failed to change some energy in
this universe?’ etc., etc. And when this is flat, ‘Can you recall a time when you failed to change
some space?’ Then: ‘Can you recall a time when you failed to change a body?’ This last
question is the one you stress. He may get nothing on the space question at all but such
incidents are in his recall or space would not exist at all for him.
70.Also, ‘Can you recall a time when you failed to change a memory?’ etc., etc. Wherever
or however the preclear is stuck in tone or condition, there he has failed to change something or
somebody.
This can also be run on the ‘theta aide of the ledger’ ‘Can you recall a time when you
successfully changed something?’ until the lag is flat. Even more simply: ‘Can you recall a
time of change?’
R2-66: ELECTING CAUSE
Worry and anxiety have their root in the changing election of cause. People who elect
cause other than self are often shifting responsibility and refusing to fix actual cause. The
‘black five’ is a no-responsibility case.
This process is a brutal one, but it is a five-star process. It often sets off a worry
machine and runs it out.
The auditing command is: ‘Point out some things which are causing things’, ‘Point out
some more things which are causing things’ etc., etc., until the lag is flat.
R2-67: OBJECTS
To a person who cannot hold the two back corners of the room, the simple location of
objects is valuable. When a person is self-auditing, this is a very valuable solo process.
The command is: ‘Locate some objects’, etc. The person looks at them or puts his
attention on them and notes what they are. This is all there is to the process. For variation, one
locates some more objects. By object is meant physical universe, present time, visible objects.
R2-68: INCOMPREHENSIBILITY
A thetan is understanding. A space or mass is no understanding. A Thetan is no mass.
An object is mass. Duplication is thus difficult.
A thetan must be able to be a mass or a space and to experience at will
incomprehensibility in order to see spaces and masses. It is a new understanding to understand
that something can be incomprehensible.
The tone scale is a study of varying degrees of ARC. Affinity, Reality and
Communication comprise understanding. With knowingness at the top of the scale, we come
down in ‘understanding’ -- (Third Dynamic knowingness), then down through relative
understandings and increasing incomprehensibility until at bottom scale (MEST) we have total
incomprehensibility and total non-comprehension.
A ‘difficult’ case is simply an incomprehensible case. The processing on this is done by
the command: ‘Spot something incomprehensible’, repeated many, many times. This ‘ups’
I.Q. and raises perception. This is a good process.
R2-69: PLEASE PASS THE OBJECT
This process was developed by long-time auditor and D.SCN., Jan Halpern. It is a
very fine process and is recommended anywhere on the scale.
71.Throughout the process, the auditor doesn’t say a word. He doesn’t answer possible
questions, he doesn’t explain in words what he wants. Under all circumstances he makes like
the Tar Baby and ‘don’t say nothin’’. He uses any gestures necessary.
STEP 1-A: Auditor stands in front of preclear, holding out a small object to him, until
the preclear takes it from his hand. As soon as the preclear takes the object, the auditor holds
out his hand, palm up, until the preclear places the object in his palm. The auditor immediately
offers it to the preclear again. This is continued until without comm-lag. The object should be
offered to the preclear from a variety of positions, once he has gotten the idea: from down near
the floor, or off to either side, over the preclear’s head. The palm should be held in a variety of
positions for the return of the object. Both hands may be used. Get the preclear doing this
really fast.
STEP I-B: When step 1-A is going swiftly and easily, the auditor introduces a switch.
After the preclear has just accepted the article, the auditor, instead of extending his palm for its
return, places his hands behind his back briefly, then conveys by gestures that the preclear is to
offer the object to him. When the preclear does so, the auditor takes the object from his hand,
but does not return it until the preclear holds out his own hand, palm up to receive it. This
exchange is continued until the preclear is offering and accepting the object from as wide a
variety of positions as the auditor used, and all other comm-lags are flat.
STEP II: The auditor, just having accepted the object, makes a gesture that this part is
over, then deliberately puts the object down where the preclear can see it, stands back, and
indicates that the preclear is to pick it up. When the preclear picks it up, the auditor gestures that
he is to put it down again anywhere he likes in the room. The instant the preclear does so, the
auditor snatches it up and puts it somewhere else. This is continued until the auditor and
preclear are racing around the room, seizing the object as soon as the other’s fingers have let go
of it.
The object isn’t necessarily placed in a different spot each time. It may be picked up and
put down again in the same place, but it must be handled each time. All sorts of tacit rules and
understandings will probably develop while this is being run.
This process rehabilitates the sense of play validates non-verbal ARC short-circuits
‘verbal machinery’ lets the preclear position matter and energy in space and time gets the
preclear up to speed murders ‘there must be a reason’ for doingness processes both auditor and
preclear equally, and, besides, it’s fun.
R2-70: EXPECTANCE LEVEL
This is a future type ‘acceptance level’. The process was contributed to by B.SCN.
Millen Belknap.
The commands are: ‘What do you expect from ...?’ The auditor fills the blank. It is a
cousin of description processing.
This process is not for low-level cases.
R2-71: ANSWERS
A relative of PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS’ is ‘Give me some answers’, as a
constantly repeated question.
It is a valuable process.
72.R2-72: SECURITY PROCESSING
It is safe to do what your parents do -- and that is evolution. Death, failure, rejection,
are safe if your parents did them.
The auditing command is: ‘Tell me some things it is safe to be’, etc. ‘Tell me some
things it is safe to do’, etc. ‘Tell me some things it is safe to have.’
This works very well.
R2-73: MAKING SOMETHING FOR THE FUTURE
The auditing command is: ‘Point out some things which are making things for the
future’.
This is a brutal process.
R2-74: PROCESSING
The auditing command is: ‘Point out some things that are processing things’. This cures
obsessive self-auditing.
R2-75: KNOWINGNESS
As everything is a condensation of knowingness, the following commands explain
much and do much.
‘Tell me something you wouldn’t mind knowing’, ‘Something you wouldn’t mind
others knowing’, ‘Invent something to know’. A ten-star process.
73.L’ENVOI
As a summary comment on these processes, it cannot be indicated too strongly that a
preclear who is psychotic, neurotic, or who is having any psychosomatic difficulty must be run
on Opening Procedure of 8C, R2-16, for many, many, many, many hours. It will be
discovered that on such preclears the use of subjective processes, which is to say those
processes which intimately address the internal world of the preclear, is fruitless. The
processes which produce large results and effects will not make the preclear well. As an
example of this, many persons have been run by the ‘best processes’ for fifty hours or more,
only to have their cases remain stagnant, and then these same persons, being run on R2-16,
Opening Procedure of 8-C, have, day after day, with an hour or two of such running per day,
commenced steady and stable gains, which they have retained. When in doubt, then, on any
process, run R2-16 and when the case claims that nothing is happening, run R2-16 and when
the case is going very jumpily forward with many losses and few gains, run R2-16 and when
R2-16 has been thoroughly run, then turn to R2-17.
The reason why R2-16 is so effective is that it immediately addresses the problem of
barriers. The preclear who is having difficulty will be found to be confounded by mechanics,
which is to say the barriers of space, energy, and mass, and that these barriers have entered
into his own universe so that he himself, in his own thinking, is encountering barriers. By
making the preclear put his attention on objects, walls, floors, ceilings, the preclear will
eventually come into the state where he, himself, is stopping his sight on the barrier, rather than
the barrier stopping the sight of the preclear, for all perception is done by stopping the
perception on what is looked at. This is only one of the reasons why Opening Procedure 8-C
works. Use it.
Although the foregoing is the totality of what we are using and calling Intensive
Procedure, any well trained auditor is expected to have at his command any of the processes of
Scientology and to use them when the occasion arises. It will be found that the older processes
are complexities of these Intensive Procedure processes, and it has been found by experience
that the simpler processes produce results on even the more complicated and difficult cases. In
fact, it requires the simplest possible process to acquire the greatest possible recovery on a
difficult case. Subjective processes should be avoided. By subjective processes is meant
consultation with the preclear’s own universe, with his mock-ups, and with his own thoughts
and considerations. For it will be found that any homo sapiens is far below the point of simply
changing his mind to make a new condition take place. This is the basic process of the thetan.
A thetan who is in good condition need only to change his mind or change his postulates in
order to alter a condition. On a case which does not exteriorize easily or which, when
exteriorized, is found to be using large quantities of energy, subjective processes must be
severely avoided. The formula of communication itself, as contained in Intensive Procedure
and in this order, should be very closely observed. Processes which are not included in
Intensive Procedure but which are very effective are End of Cycle processes. An End of Cycle
process run subjectively would be ‘What are you willing to destroy?’, ‘What are you willing to
have destroy you?’ As the preclear is sitting on Survive (persist) and will not change, and as
this is what is wrong with the preclear, we see that he has drifted far from being able to create
and being able to destroy. Thus this process will be found to achieve results. However, it is
omitted because it is too much of a temptation for an auditor to run such a process on a heavily
interiorized preclear. The preclear will recover much better by use of the formula of
communication.
The keynote of Intensive Procedure is making and breaking communication.
When in doubt, all you need do is have the preclear make and break communication
with objects or spaces in the physical universe and remedy any difficulty in havingness which
results by having the preclear duplicate anything he can see. This would apply to an interiorized
or exteriorized case. Actually, the sole use of mock-ups today is in duplication and in the
Remedy of Havingness. All processes except the Remedy of Havingness itself are done with
74.great attention to the certainty of the preclear. This is stressed. In the matter of Remedy of
Havingness, it is beneficial for the preclear to remedy havingness with mock-ups which are
vague and of which he is not even vaguely certain. As havingness itself does not depend upon
any reality, so does the Remedy of Havingness work in the absence of reality. Only in the case
of the Remedy of Havingness, however, is uncertainty or unreality on the part of the preclear
tolerated. At all other times the auditor must be very certain that the preclear is sure of what he
is doing.
The attitude of the auditor giving Intensive Procedure is not today expected to be a
sympathetic or coddling one. Scientology processing today is done overtly, challengingly. An
auditor is expected to be top scale on the Chart of Attitudes in all departments except Trust. He
is expected to distrust the preclear, and even act like he distrusts the preclear. This attitude will
be found to be far more acceptable to the preclear than a trustful one. While the auditor never
gets angry at the preclear, never dramatizes at the preclear, and sticks to his task in auditing, he
should be markedly insistent on the certainty. He should be very challenging about the fact that
the preclear said it was certain. The auditor does not believe the fact that the preclear found
whatever it was real. By doing this the preclear is made to postulate over and over and over that
he is in communication.
Many a preclear does something, then sits back to see if anything happened. This,
when a severe condition (the ‘observer’, where the preclear cannot be anything -- cannot
occupy a source point or receipt point) can be remedied by having the preclear touch a part of
his body or the room with his finger and then stand back to see if anything happened. His
communication lags can be long on this. The commands are, ‘Touch your nose’, ‘Now let go
and see if anything happens’. This must be done, to be effective, for some time. Its goal as a
process is to wipe out fear of consequences.
For a preclear who has suffered much loss, the auditor can have the preclear place an
object (matches, a handkerchief or anything the preclear owns) out in front of the preclear, then
have the preclear let go of it, sit back and wait for it to come to him (which it won’t, of course,
without volition on the part of the preclear). Then he repeats the action, waiting for the object to
go away from him. The communication lag of recognition of the process and the somatics can
be severe. The waiting should be in terms of many minutes each time.
IMPORTANT: IN PROCESSING PSYCHOTICS AND NEUROTICS OF
WHATEVER DEGREE, USE ONLY R2-16, OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C, EACH PART
UNTIL THE PERSON IS SURE WHO IS DOING IT. USE ONLY R2-16 UNTIL THE
CASE IS FULLY SANE. USE NO OTHER PROCESS OF ANY KIND.
The first and most basic definition of any part of communication is that communication
or any part thereof is a consideration. If this were not so, communication in this universe
would be impossible as a perfect communication requires an exact duplication of source point at
receipt point. A duplication, to be perfect, would mean a ‘copy’ in the same time, same space,
with the same mass. The law that two objects cannot occupy the same space is peculiar to the
MEST Universe and is the law which keeps it space stretched. Thus a perfect duplication defies
the basic law of the Universe. But as duplication is a consideration, communication is possible
to the degree that the preclear can freely make considerations. Any process which improves the
ability to duplicate by removing the fear of it or improving the ability of the preclear to consider
freely without large reasons improves as well, duplication.
‘Things you are not duplicating’, ‘Things which are not duplicating you’ is one of a
variety of processes.
The game of the preclear is to set up things which cannot be duplicated and to duplicate
anything set up. He can play it as well as he can consider freely or as well as he can duplicate.
Considerations are bettered by having the preclear put considerations into any object for
a long time, then having the preclear make the object have considerations about him. The
75.commands are, ‘Put some considerations into that ...’, ‘Have the ... have some considerations
about you’. All comm-lag, as in all other processes, must be reduced. Havingness may have to
be remedied.
76.THIS IS A LIST TO BE RUN BY CHANGE OF SPACE PROCESSING
1. The first geographic location of the Thetan in the MEST Universe as soon as he came
from the Home Universe.
2. The geographic location where he created his first facsimile.
3. Where the Thetan received his first motivator in the MEST Universe.
4. Where the Thetan committed his first overt act in the MEST Universe.
5. Where he started the first spiral. Also the end of the spiral. Do this with all spirals up to
present time.
6. The geographic location where the Thetan first was in contact with a body in any way.
7. The jack-in-the-box.
8. The Obsession.
9. The first blanketing.
10. The halver.
11. Facsimile One.
12. Before Earth.
13. Before MEST Universe.
14. The joiner.
15. The Assumption.
16. His first borrowing.
17. His first nipping.
18. The Ice Cube.
19. The first between lives area.
20. The Emanator.
21. The first Theta Trap.
22. The body in pawn.
23. The Body Builder.
24. The Jiggler.
25. The Whirler.
26. The Bouncer.
27. The Spinner.
28. The Rocker.
29. The Boxer.
30. The Faller.
31. The Education.
32. The Fly Trap.
33. The Ded.
34. The Dedex.
35. The Mis-assist.
36. The first geographical location the Thetan took on Earth.
37. Glare Fights.
38. Implant station.
77.SOP 8-D
This procedure is for use by a trained Scientologist. It can be used in conjunction with
ADVANCED COURSE PROCEDURE and its primary goal is the delivery of heavy cases
however it can be extensively applied to all cases. It is better to run a Step 1 well on 8-C before
using this process upon him.
OPENING PROCEDURE: Have PC move his body around the room locating SPOTS
IN MEST SPACE. Have him locate many such spots and designate them with his finger.
Have him do this until he can do it very well and until he obeys an auditor’s directions easily.
STEP I: Ask preclear to be three feet back of his chair. This is the total step. The auditor
does not press the matter further even if the PC is.
STEP II: Have preclear look at his environment and whatever he sees have him
duplicate it many times. Then have him duplicate a nothingness he makes or finds, many times.
STEP III: Have preclear hold the two back corners of the room (2 minutes at least or
two or more hours). Then have him locate spots in space where he is not.
STEP IV: AN E-METER STEP. Give PC a full assessment by putting him on an E-Meter
at this point and asking him to name the people with whom he has been associated since
birth. The auditor writes these down and indicates by a symbol after each name whether the
action of the needle is stuck, small, medium or violent.
On a consistently stuck needle, use next to last list of Self Analysis until needle frees.
Then choose that person who got the biggest reaction on the meter and using this person have
preclear find spots or spaces where this person would be safe. The preclear must be certain of
the fact. The auditing command is, ‘Find some places where ... would be safe’.
One continues this until the needle shows no further reaction, on just this first person.
Then one goes to OPENING PROCEDURE and starts all the way through the steps again.
Now one takes the same person as the auditor first chose and runs this processing question
only. ‘Spot some things which your ... does not own.’ This is the total question. (One to two
hour communication lag may not be unusual.) The auditor continues to ask this question and
the preclear continues to spot things which this person does not own until the needle is
relatively inactive.
Then the auditor goes to OPENING PROCEDURE above and continues through the
steps. But now he takes a new assessment and proceeds exactly as before. ‘Places where ...
would be safe’ is Universe Processing. ‘Things ... does not own’ is Ownership Processing.
No variations of command of any kind whatsoever should be used by the auditor as
these are not dichotomies and variations can be very hard on the preclear, even making him ill.
The auditor should add ‘The spirit of Man’, ‘The spirit of Woman’, God, and the body.
STUDY THIS PROCESS WELL BEFORE USING IT. DO NOT DEPART FROM IT
OR VARY IT UNTIL PRECLEAR IS STABLY EXTERIORIZED. THE ACTUAL GOAL OF
THIS PROCESS IS TO BRING THE PRECLEAR TO TOLERATE ANY VIEWPOINT.
78.OUTLINE OF LECTURES 1-3 OF PROFESSIONAL COURSE
JULY, 1954
SCIENTOLOGY, ITS BACKGROUND
or a history of Knowledge.
SCIENTOLOGY
the Western Anglicized continuance of many earlier forms of wisdom. Scio -- study
EARLIEST VERSION -- THE VEDA
Knowingness or sacred lore
The most ancient sacred literature of the Hindus comprising over a hundred extant
books. One or all four of the canonical collection of hymns, prayers and formulas
which are the foundation of the Vedic religion
The Rig-Veda
Yajur-Veda
Sama-Veda
Atharva-Veda
The Cycle of Action
The meaning of Veda -- Knowingness
Mention of the Book of Job as oldest written work from India
THE TAO -- THE WAY
Realization of the mystery of mysteries -- i.e., the way to attain knowingness The Tao-Teh-
King by Lao-Tzu (604-531 B)
Taught conformity with the cosmic order and simplicity in social and political
organization
Entirely concentrated on the mind and its discipline
Contemporary with Confucius
The principle of wu-wei (non assertion or non-compulsion) control by permitting self-determinism
THE DHYANA -- KNOWINGNESS AND LOOKINGNESS
From mythical times. Named from the legendary Hindu Sage Dharma whose many
progeny were the personifications of virtue and religious rights. We are familiar with
the Dhyana in the form of Buddhism. A BOHDI is one who has attained intellectual and
ethical perfection by human means, comparable to our theta-clear in Scientology.
GAUTAMA SAKYAMUNI (563-483 B)
Looked upon as founder of the Dhyana. Never claimed to be anything but a human
being, did not profess to bring any revelation from a supernatural source, did not
proclaim himself a savior. He professed only to teach men to liberate themselves as he
had liberated himself.
From the Dharmapada, a collection of verses said to have been written by Gautama:
‘All that we are is the result of what we have thought: it is founded on our thoughts, it
is made up of our thoughts.’
‘By oneself evil is done by oneself one suffers by oneself evil is left undone by oneself
one is purified. Purity and impurity belong to oneself no one can purify another.’
‘You yourself must make an effort the Buddhas are only preachers. The thoughtful who
enter the way are freed from the bondage of sin.’
‘He who does not rouse himself when it is time to rise, who, though young and strong,
is full of sloth, whose will and thoughts are weak, that lazy and idle man will never find
the way to enlightment.’
‘Strenuousness is the path of immortality, sloth the path of death. Those who are
strenuous do not die those who are slothful are as if dead already.’
The religion of Buddhism, carried by its teachers, brought civilization into the existing
barbarisms of India, China, Japan and the Near East -or about two thirds of Earth’s
population. Here was the first broadcast wisdom which summated into high cultures.
79.THE HEBREWS
Their definition of MESSIAH is a ‘teacher or bringer of wisdom’. Their holy work,
known to us as the ‘Old Testament’ leans heavily on the sources we have already
mentioned.
JESUS OF NAZARETH
The legend of his study in India
Age of 30-33 teaching and healing
Use of parables like Gautama
Buddhist principles of brotherly love and compassion Death by Crucifixion
SPREAD OF CHRISTIANITY INTO THE BARBARISM OF EUROPE
Religion with fur breech-clouts
CLOSE OF THE TRADE ROUTES
WESTERN SEEKERS OF WISDOM
The separation of science and search from religion -- artificial division
The Early Greeks
Lucretius
Spinoza
Nietzsche
Schopenhauer
Spencer
Freud
We think of these as beginning our intellectualism. They quickened it. The bulk of their
sources was Asiatic.
DEFINITION OF RELIGION -- WEBSTER
‘(3) The profession or practice of religious beliefs religious observances collectively
rites.’
‘(4) Devotion or fidelity, conscientiousness.’
RELIGION -- RELIGIOUS PHILOSOPHY
Scientology has accomplished the goal of religion expressed in all Man’s
written history, the freeing of the soul by wisdom.
It is a far more intellectual religion than that known to the West as late as 1950.
If we, without therapy, simply taught our truths we would bring civilization to a
barbaric West.
80.THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY - THE SCIENCE OF CERTAINTY
FOREWORD
For nearly a quarter of a century, I have been engaged in the investigation of the
fundamentals of life, the material universe and human behavior. Such an adventure leads one
down many highways, through many byroads, into many back alleys of uncertainty, through
many strata of life, through many personal vicissitudes, into the teeth of vested interests, across
the rim of hell and into the very arms of heaven. Many before me have made their way across
these tumultuous oceans of data, where every drop of water appears to be any other drop of
water and yet where one must find the drop. Almost everything I have studied and observed
has been evaluated otherwise somewhere, at some time, in relation to this or that.
What equipment must one have to venture upon these wastes? Where are the rules-books,
the maps, the signposts? All one perceives when he peers into the darkness of the
unknown are the lonely bones of those who, reaching before, have found their hands empty
and their lives destroyed. Such a thing is a lonely drama one must cheer one’s own triumphs
and weep to himself his despair. The cold brutality of the scientific method fails far back,
almost at the starting point. The airy spirallings and dread mysteries of India, where I drank
deep, lead only into traps. The euphoria of religion, the ecstasies of worship and debauchery,
become as meaningless as sand when one seeks in them the answer to the riddle of all
existence. Many have roved upon this unmapped track. Some have survived to say a fraction of
what they knew, some have observed one thing and said quite another, some looked knowing
and said naught. One engaged upon such a quest does not even know the answer to that most
important question of all: Will it be good for man to loose upon him all in a rush as an
avalanche, the knowingness of eternity?
There are those who would tell you that only a fiend would set you free, and that
freedom leads at best into the darkest hells, and there are those to inform you that freedom is
for you and not for them, but there are also men of kind heart who know how precious is the
cup and drink of wide, unbounded ways. Who is to say whether man will benefit at all from
this knowledge hardly won? You are the only one who can say.
Observation, application, experience and test will tell you if the trek has been made and
the answer found. For this is the science of knowing how to know. It is a science which does
not include within it cold and musty data, data to be thrust down the throat without examination
and acceptance. This is the track of knowing how to know. Travel it and see.
81.THE FACTORS
(Summation of the considerations and examinations of the human spirit and the material
universe completed between A.D. 1923 and 1953)
1. Before the beginning was a Cause and the entire purpose of the Cause was the creation
of effect.
2. In the beginning and forever is the decision and the decision is TO BE.
3. The first action of beingness is to assume a viewpoint.
4. The second action of beingness is to extend from the viewpoint, points to view, which
are dimension points.
5. Thus there is space created, for the definition of space is: viewpoint of dimension. And
the purpose of a dimension point is space and a point of view.
6. The action of a dimension point is reaching and withdrawing.
7. And from the viewpoint to the dimension points there are connection and interchange.
Thus new dimension points are made. Thus there is communication.
8. And thus there is light.
9. And thus there is energy.
10. And thus there is life.
11. But there are other viewpoints and these viewpoints outthrust points to view. And there
comes about an interchange amongst viewpoints but the interchange is never otherwise
than in terms of exchanging dimension points.
12. The dimension point can be moved by the viewpoint, for the viewpoint, in addition to
creative ability and consideration, possesses volition and potential independence of
action and the viewpoint, viewing dimension points, can change in relation to its own
or other dimension points or viewpoints. Thus comes about all the fundamentals there
are to motion.
13. The dimension points are each and every one, whether large or small, solid. And they
are solid solely because the viewpoints say they are solid.
14. Many dimension points combine into larger gases, fluids or solids. Thus there is
matter. But the most valued point is admiration, and admiration is so strong its absence
alone permits persistence.
15. The dimension point can be different from other dimension points and thus can possess
an individual quality. And many dimension points can possess a similar quality, and
others can possess a similar quality unto themselves. Thus comes about the quality of
classes of matter.
16. The viewpoint can combine dimension points into forms and the forms can be simple or
complex and can be at different distances from the viewpoints and so there can be
combinations of form. And the forms are capable of motion and the viewpoints are
capable of motion and so there can be motion of forms.
17. And the opinion of the viewpoint regulates the consideration of the forms, their stillness
or their motion, and these considerations consist of assignment of beauty or ugliness to
the forms and these considerations alone are art.
18. It is the opinions of the viewpoints that some of these forms should endure. Thus there
is survival.
19. And the viewpoint can never perish but the form can perish.
20. And the many viewpoints, interacting, become dependent upon one another’s forms
and do not choose to distinguish completely the ownership of dimension points and so
comes about a dependency upon the dimension points and upon the other viewpoints.
21. From this comes a consistency of viewpoint of the interaction of dimension points and
this, regulated is TIME.
22. And there are universes.
23. The universes, then, are three in number: the universe created by one viewpoint, the
universe created by every other viewpoint, the universe created by the mutual action of
viewpoints which is agreed to be upheld -- the physical universe.
24. And the viewpoints are never seen. And the viewpoints consider more and more that the
dimension points are valuable. And the viewpoints try to become the anchor points and
82.forget that they can create more points and space and forms. Thus comes about scarcity.
And the dimension points can perish and so the viewpoints assume that they, too, can
perish.
25. Thus comes about death.
26. The manifestations of pleasure and pain, of thought, emotion and effort, of thinking, of
sensation, of affinity, reality, communication, of behavior and being are thus derived
and the riddles of our universe are apparently contained and answered herein.
27. There is beingness, but Man believes there is only becomingness.
28. The resolution of any problem posed hereby is the establishment of viewpoints and
dimension points, the betterment of condition and concourse amongst dimension
points, and, thereby, viewpoints, and the remedy of abundance or scarcity in all things,
pleasant or ugly, by the rehabilitation of the ability of the viewpoint to assume points of
view and create and uncreate, neglect, start, change and stop dimension points of any
kind at the determinism of the viewpoint. Certainty in all three universes must be
regained, for certainty, not data, is knowledge.
29. In the opinion of the viewpoint, any beingness, any thing, is better than no thing, any
effect is better than no effect, any universe better than no universe, any particle better
than no particle, but the particle of admiration is best of all.
30. And above these things there might be speculation only. And below these things there is
the playing of the game. But these things which are written here Man can experience
and know. And some may care to teach these things and some may care to use them to
assist those in distress and some may desire to employ them to make individuals and
organizations more able and so give to Earth a culture of which we can be proud.
Humbly tendered as a gift to Man
by L. Ron Hubbard
April 23, 1953
83.THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY
Scientology is the science of knowledge. It contains many parts. Its most fundamental
division is Scientology itself and Para-Scientology. Under Scientology we group those things
of which we can be certain and only those things of which we can be certain. Knowledge itself
is certainty knowledge is not data. Knowingness itself is certainty. Sanity is certainty,
providing only that that certainty does not fall beyond the conviction of another when he views
it. To obtain a certainty one must be able to observe.
But what is the level of certainty we require? And what is the level of observation we
require for a certainty or a knowledge to exist? If a man can stand before a tree and by sight,
touch or other perception know that he is confronting a tree and be able to perceive its form and
be quite sure he is confronting a tree, we have the level of certainty we require. If the man will
not look at the tree or, although it is observably a tree to others, if he discovers it to be a blade
of grass or a sun, then he is below the level of certainty required and would not be able to grasp
Scientology. Some other person, helpfully inclined, would have to direct his perception to the
tree until the man perceived without duress that it was indeed a tree he confronted. That is the
only level of certainty we require in order to qualify knowledge.
For knowledge is observation and is given to those who would look. Things about
which there is observational difficulty, such as mirror mazes, items hidden in smoke, objects
guessed at in the dark, are outside the boundaries of Scientology.
In order to obtain knowledge and certainty, it is necessary to be able to observe, in fact,
three universes in which there could be trees. The first of these is one’s own universe one
should be able to create for his own observation in its total form for total perception, a tree. The
second universe would be the material universe, which is the universe of matter, energy, space
and time, which is the common meeting ground of all of us. The third universe is actually a
class of universes, which could be called ‘the other fellow’s universe’, for he and all the class
of ‘other fellows’ have universes of their own. A complete clarity on all three universes would
be well above any goal attempted even in Scientology, and it is not necessary that one be as
certain as this of three universes before one can be certain of Scientology, for certainty of
Scientology requires only the same order of certainty one would have to have to know he was
confronting a physical universe tree.
Para-Scientology is that large bin which includes all greater or lesser uncertainties.
Here are the questionable things, the things of which the common normal observer
cannot be sure with a little study.
Here are theories, here are groups of data, even groups commonly accepted as
‘known’. Some of the classified bodies of data which fall in Para-Scientology are: Dianetics,
incidents on the ‘whole-track’, the immortality of Man, the existence of God, engrams
containing pain and unconsciousness and yet all perception, pre-natals, clears, character, and
many other things which, even when closely and minutely observed, still are not certain things
to those who observe them. Such things have relative truth. They have to some a high degree
of reality they have to others non-existence. They require a highly specialized system in order
to observe them at all.
Working with such uncertainties one can produce broad and sweeping results: one can
make the ill well again, one can right even the day which went most wrong but those things
which require highly specialized communication systems remain uncertain to many. Because
Dianetics is placed in this category does not mean it is disowned, it means simply that it is a
specialized thing based on theory which, no matter how workable, requires specialized
observation. It does not mean Dianetics will cease to work, but it means that Dianetics is not
easily nor quickly forwarded into a complete certainty.
84.Yet Dianetics is more of an exact science than many which have before borne that name
and Dianetics is an intimate part of Scientology, for it is through its special communication
processes that the data was won which has become Scientology.
Also under the heading of Para-Scientology one would place such things as past lives,
mysterious influences, astrology, mysticism, religion, psychology, psychiatry, nuclear physics
and any other science based on theory.
A doctor, for instance, may seem entirely certain of the cause of some disease, yet it
depends upon the doctor’s certainty for the layman to accept that cause of the disease. Here we
have a specialized communications system. We may have an arduously trained observer, a
highly mechanistic observation resting upon a theory which is not, even at this late date,
entirely accepted even in the best circles. That penicillin cures certain things is a certainty to the
doctor even when penicillin suddenly and inexplicably fails to cure something. Any
inexplicable failure introduces an uncertainty, which thereafter removes the subject from the
realm of an easily obtained certainty.
Hypnotism, no matter how certain the hypnotist may be that he is effective on some
people, is a wild variable and, even in expert practice, is a definite uncertainty. The use of
drugs or shock produce such variable results that they class far down a gradient scale which
would begin with a fair degree of certainty and which would end with almost no certainty of
any kind.
We have here, then, a parallel between certainty and sanity.
The less certain the individual on any subject, the less sane he could be said to be upon
that subject the less certain he is of what he views in the material universe, what he views in his
own or the other fellow’s universe, the less sane he could be said to be.
The road to sanity is demonstrably the road to increasing certainty. Starting at any level,
it is only necessary to obtain a fair degree of certainty on the MEST universe to improve
considerably one’s beingness. Above that, one obtains some certainty of his own universe and
some certainty of the other fellow’s universe.
Certainty, then, is clarity of observation. Of course above this, vitally so, is certainty in
creation. Here is the artist, here is the master, here is the very great spirit.
As one advances he discovers that what he first perceived as a certainty can be
considerably improved. Thus we have certainty as a gradient scale. It is not an absolute, but it
is defined as the certainty that one perceives or the certainty that one creates what one perceives
or the certainty that there is perception. Sanity and perception, certainty and perception,
knowledge and observation are and then all of a kind, and amongst them we have sanity.
What will Scientology do? It has already been observed by many who are not that
doubtful thing, the ‘qualified observer’, that people who have travelled a road toward certainty
improve in the many ways people consider it desirable to improve.
The road into uncertainty is the road toward psychosomatic illness, doubts, anxieties,
fears, worries and vanishing awareness. As awareness is decreased, so does certainty decrease
and the end of this road is a nothingness quite opposite from the nothingness which can create.
It is a nothingness which is a total effect.
Simplicity, it would be suspected, would be the keynote of any process, any
communications system, which would deliver into a person’s hands the command of his own
beingness. The simplicity consists of the observation of three universes. The first step is the
observation of one’s own universe and what has taken place in that universe in the past. The
second step would be observation of the material universe and direct consultation with it to
discover its forms, depth, emptinesses and solidities. The third step would be the observation
85.of other people’s universes or their observation of the MEST universe, for there are a multitude
of viewpoints of these three universes.
Where observation of one of these three is suppressed, hidden, denied, the individual is
unable to mount beyond a certain point into certainty. Here we have a triangle not unlike the
affinity, reality, communication triangle of Dianetics. These three universes are interactive to
the degree that one raises all three by raising one, but one can raise two only so far before it is
restrained by the uncertainty on the third. Thus, any point on this triangle is capable of
suppressing the other two points and any point of this triangle is capable of raising the other
two points.
86.THE TRIANGLE OF CERTAINTY OF AWARENESS
This drawing could be called the scale of awareness. It is also the scale of action and
the cycle of action.
The numbers represent entirely arbitrary levels which yet can be found to mean levels of
predictable attitudes. It would be found that humanity at this time hovers in terms of awareness
at the level of 2.0, slightly above or slightly below here is scarcely any awareness at all
compared to the awareness which is available. It is very puzzling to people at higher levels of
awareness why people behave towards them as they do such higher level people have not
realized that they are not seen, much less understood. People at low levels of awareness do not
observe, but substitute for observation preconceptions, evaluation and suppositions, and even
physical pain by which to attain their certainties. In the field of Zen Buddhism there is a practice
of administering a sudden blow by which is obtained a feeling of certainty. Here is a relatively
false certainty -- the certainty of impact, although all certainty actually is derived below the level
of 10.0 from prior impact for its conviction. After a brutal accident or operation under
anaesthetic, it can be observed that individuals will sometimes react with an enormous
conviction which yet does not seem to be based upon any fact. A certainty has been carried
home to them in terms of a physical impact. This, then, is not a self-determined certainty and
the self-determined certainty carries one into high echelons. The mistaken use of shock by the
ancient Greek upon the insane, the use of whips in old Bedlam, all sought to deliver sufficient
certainty to the insane to cause them to be less insane.
Certainty delivered by blow and punishment is a non-self-determined certainty. It is
productive of stimulus-response behavior. At a given stimulus a dog who has been beaten, for
instance, will react invariably, providing he has been sufficiently beaten, but if he has been
beaten too much, the stimulus will result only in confused bewilderment. Thus certainty
delivered by blows, by applied force, eventually brings about a certainty as absolute as one
could desire -- total unawareness. Unconsciousness itself is a certainty which is sought by
many individuals who have failed repeatedly to reach any high level of awareness certainty.
These people then desire an unawareness certainty. So it seems that the thirst for certainty can
lead one into oblivion if one seeks it as an effect.
An uncertainty is the product of two certainties. One of these is a conviction, whether
arrived at by observation (causative) or by a blow (effected). The other is a negative certainty.
One can be sure that something is and one can be sure that something is not. He can be sure
there is something, no matter what it is, present, and there that is nothing present. These two
certainties commingling create a condition of uncertainty known as ‘maybe’. A ‘maybe’
continues to be held in suspense in an individual’s mind simply because he cannot decide
whether it is nothing or something. He grasps and holds the certainties each time he has been
given evidence or has made the decision that it is a somethingness and each time he has come to
suppose that it is a nothingness. Where these two certainties of something and nothing are
concerned with and can vitally influence one’s continuance in a state of beingness or where one
merely supposes they can influence such a state of beingness, a condition of anxiety arises.
Thus anxiety, indecision, uncertainty, a state of ‘maybe’, can exist only in the presence of poor
observation or the inability to observe. Such a state can be remedied simply by eradicating from
the past of the individual, first the conviction that the matter is important, next the conviction
that it is totally unimportant, next all the times when he was certain of the somethingness and
then all the times he was certain of the nothingness. One merely causes the individual to
observe in terms of the three universes.
We face, then, two general types of mind. One is an analytical thing which depends for
its conclusions upon perception or even creation of things to perceive and bases its judgment on
observation in terms of three universes. This we call the ‘analytical mind’. We could also call it
the spirit. We could also call it the ‘awareness of awareness unit’. We could call it the
conscious individual himself in the best of his beingness. We could call it the mathematical term
thetan. Whatever its name we could have precisely the same thing, a viewpoint capable of
87.creation and observation of things created which concludes and directs action in terms of the
existing state of three universes, as they are observed directly.
The other type of mind resembles nothing if not an electronic brain. It receives its data
in terms of conviction, delivered by force. It is directed by and reacts to hidden influences
rather than observed influences and is, to a large extent, the reverse image and has reverse
intentions to the analytical mind.
This we call the reactive mind. It is an actual entity and it operates in terms of
experience and theory. It sets up thinking machinery around uncertainties and the course of its
thinking is downward. It seeks to direct and dictate out of pain and the effort to avoid pain.
The primary difference between these two ‘minds’ is that one, the analytical mind, is
without finite duration, and the other, the reactive mind, is susceptible to death.
These two minds are a certainty since they can be observed by anyone, even in himself.
He knows he is aware of things around him, and he knows that he has definite desires which
are perfectly reasonable and he knows, if he is a homo sapiens or animal, that internal
commands and compulsions, even those which tell him to eat and tell his heart to beat, are not
directly within his control.
All thinking can then be divided for our purposes into thinking based upon direct
observation and conclusions from observation, and thinking which has to know before it can
be or observe. Analytical thought can be called analytical thought because it directly observes
and analyzes what it observes in terms of observations which are immediately present. The
reactive mind concludes and acts entirely on experience and with only a fragmentary regard to
things present which could be observed. The reactive mind begins and continues with
uncertainties and, where the course of the analytical mind is progressively upward, the course
of the reactive mind is progressively downward.
The reactive mind comes into being as a servant of the analytical mind, and is set up by
the analytical mind to work upon and store data about the basic uncertainty that there might be
something and there might be nothing. The reactive mind then continues in growth and from
the servant, if the analytical mind does not observe it, tends to become the master.
The goals of the two minds are not separate goals. The reactive mind is a makeshift
effort on the part of the viewpoint to perceive things which it believes to be unperceivable
except by comparison of uncertainties. Both minds are seeking to persist and endure through
time, which is to say, survive. The analytical mind can, unless it becomes too uncertain and by
that uncertainty has set up too many reactive mechanisms, persist indefinitely. The reactive
mind pursues the cycle of life span.
The analytical mind seeks by creation to cause an effect the reactive mind seeks by
duplication, borrowing, and experience to cause an effect. Both minds, then, are seeking to
cause an effect, and this is their entire motivation for action.
Each of the three universes seeks to persist indefinitely. Each is continuously caused,
and each is continually receiving an effect. Each has its own adjudication of what it should
receive as an effect and what it should cause.
Time itself consists of a continuous interaction of the universes. Each may have its own
space each has its own particular energy.
The urge of any of these three universes towards survival is sub-divisible for each of
the three universes into eight dynamics. There are, then, four groups of eight dynamics each:
the eight dynamics of one’s own universe, the eight dynamics of the physical universe, the
eight dynamics of the other’s universe, as well as the eight dynamics of the triangle itself.
88.These dynamics could be sub-divided as follows: the first dynamic would be that one
most intimate to the universe which could be said to be the dynamic urging the survival of self.
The second dynamic would be that one of the persistence of admiration in many forms in one’s
own and the other’s universe. This admiration could take the form of sex, eating, or purely the
sensation of creation such as sex and children. In the physical universe it would be that light
emanation similar to sunlight. The third dynamic could be said to be that dynamic embracing
persistence of groups of objects or entities. The fourth dynamic would concern itself with an
entire species. The fifth dynamic would concern itself with other living species and would
embrace all other living species. The sixth dynamic would embrace, in terms of survival, the
space, energy, matter and forms of the universe as themselves. The seventh dynamic would be
the urge to survive of the spirits or spiritual aspects of each universe. The eighth dynamic
would be the overall creativeness or destructiveness as a continuing impulse.
Each impulse is concerned wholly with systems of communication. Communication
requires a viewpoint and a destination in its most elementary form, and as this grows more
complex and as it grows more ‘important’, communication grows more rigid and fixed as to its
codes and lines. The reason for communication is to effect effects and observe effects.
Each of the three universes has its own triangle of affinity, reality and communication.
These three things are interdependent one upon another and one cannot exist independent of the
other two. Affinity is the characteristic of the energy as to its vibration, condensation,
rarefaction, and, in the physical universe, its degree of cohesion or dispersion. Reality
depends upon coincidence or non-coincidence of flow and is marked mainly by the direction of
flow. It is essentially agreement. Communication is the volume of flow or lack of flow. Of
these three, communication is by far the most important. Affinity and reality exist to further
communication. Under affinity we have, for instance, all the varied emotions which go from
apathy at 0.1 through grief, fear, anger, antagonism, boredom, enthusiasm, exhilaration and
serenity in that order. It is affinity and this rising scale of the characteristics of emotion which
give us the tone-scale. The tone-scale can be a certainty to anyone who has seen other beings
react emotionally, who has himself felt emotion, and who has seen the varied moods of the
physical universe itself. The periodic chart of chemistry is itself a sort of tone-scale.
There is a downward spiral on the tone-scale and an upward spiral. These spirals are
marked by decreasing or increasing awareness. To go up scale one must increase his power to
observe with certainty to go down scale one must decrease his power to observe. There are two
certainties here. One is a complete certainty of total awareness which would be at 40.0 on the
tone-scale, and the other is a certainty of total unawareness which would be 0.0 on the tone-scale
or nearly so. Neither end, however, is itself an absolute for the analytical mind, and the
analytical mind can go below 0 of the reactive mind. However, these two classes of certainty
are very wide in their satisfaction of the qualifications of a certainty. Because the two extremes
of the scale are both zeros in terms of space, it is possible to confuse one for the other and so
make it appear that total awareness would be total unawareness. Experience and observation
can disabuse one of this idea. The scale is not circular.
The characteristics and potentiality of the top of the scale or near the top of the scale are
unbounded creation, outflow, certainty, going-awayness, explosion, holding apart, spreading
apart, letting go, reaching, goals of a causative nature, widening space, freedom from time,
separateness, differentiation, givingness of sensation, vapourisingness, glowingness,
lightness, whiteness, desolidifyingness, total awareness, total understanding, total ARC.
The bottom of the scale and the vicinity around it includes death, inflow, certainty,
coming-backness, implosion, letting-come-together, pulling together, holding together,
withdrawing, effect goals (ambition to be an effect rather than a cause), contracting space, no
time or infinite time in a moment, connectingness, identification, identity, receivingness of
sensation, condensation, blackness, solidification, no-awareness, no understanding, no ARC.
The various characteristics or intentions are observable for any dynamic and any
universe.
89.Between these two extremes is the mean of action where complete freedom to do any of
these things of the top or bottom of the scale is exercised. Therefore, somewhere between 3.5
on the tone scale and 36.5 there is action.
The above conditions of top and bottom of the scale, of course, reach away from the
extreme and towards each other.
As awareness becomes more fixed, intentions become less flexible in action.
Communications systems become more rigid, more complex and less susceptible of alteration.
One alters these communications systems, however, by raising or lowering certainty on the
three universes.
The principal difference between the analytical mind in a state of awareness itself, and
the reactive mind, is that the analytical mind, highly aware, knows that it is not the thing but is
the viewpoint of things. Of this it can be very certain as it increases in awareness.
The reactive mind conceives itself to be the thing. The analytical mind is in a state of
becoming without reaching the point of being. The reactive mind conceives itself to be in a state
of being and so resists becoming.
Perception is accomplished by the analytical mind in a high state of awareness by its
own outflow and inflow or by its receipt of inflows which it can outflow. The reactive mind
perceives by inflow only, and makes complete recordings of the inflow.
The analytical mind is capable of developing its own energy. It is the energy of the
analytical mind which empowers the reactive mind, but the reactive mind can be empowered as
well by the energy of other minds and by the life energy contained in any living thing. Thus the
reactive mind can become the servant of all things, it can believe it is anything, it can believe it
is owned or has the identity of anyone, regardless of whom it was created to serve. The
analytical mind serves itself in a continuing knowledge of serving itself, but it serves as well
and knows it serves the other two universes.
The analytical mind extends from it points or observes points extended from it and thus
conceives space. Space is only the viewpoint of dimension. The dimension depends upon those
points which give it boundary. Within these dimensions called space, the analytical mind can
create energy and form and thus, by change of form, beget time.
Whether created by or within any one of the three universes, flow of energy is
accomplished by setting up a terminal and flowing towards it from a viewpoint a stream of
energy or by setting up two terminals and causing a flow between them. Each universe could
be said to be a two-terminal universe, but flows can be set up on a basis of more than two
terminals. The basic unit of any universe in terms of energy is two. This, however, does not
restrict nor qualify the number of viewpoints which any universe can have.
A physical universe, however, is observably a two-terminal universe and a two-point
universe, and it is also observable that the other two universes set up almost invariably two
terminals or more and utilize two viewpoints each.
Very low on the scale in terms of awareness, the analytical mind conceives itself to be
the reactive mind and so does not act or perform to put out dimension points so as to get space,
and does not generate for its own accountability energy. It does, however, always generate
energy whether it admits it is doing so or not.
The concern of two viewpoints is attention. Each viewpoint is apt to be curious about or
desire the attention of another viewpoint. The most valuable part of an attention interchange is
admiration. Admiration is a special particle. It is a universal solvent. It is the very substance of
a communication line, and it is that thing which is considered desirable in the game of the three
universes. Admiration goes into the interplay of the universes in the form of made-up objects or
90.even in the form of bodies. These made-up objects could be called ‘creative pictures’. These,
as they become more complex in form, take on the aspect of a life of their own and become
animated beings.
Two viewpoints setting up terminals to be viewed by the other viewpoint demand
attention one from the other and will invent all manner of ‘reasons’ to command the continuing
attention of the other viewpoint. One of the primary methods of operation is to make one’s
object or action of object so strange that the other viewpoint cannot look away. Another is to
make the object or action of object so artistic or colorful or interesting that the other viewpoint
cannot look away. Another method is the command by force for attention. Another method is to
inhibit the attention so as to invite it solely to one’s objects.
One can plot this as a cycle of demand for attention with curiosity below 40.0, desire
below that, enforcement down to as low as 1.5 on the scale, and inhibition at 1.1 on down.
The lowest methods of this scale are quite observable amongst men, and the primary operation,
very low on the scale, is inhibition of attention elsewhere. By cutting the communication lines
of another viewpoint, an effect is created on the other viewpoint by which that viewpoint fixes
with whatever emotion (since any attention is better than no attention) upon the products or
objects of that one who cut the communication line. There are many methods of cutting
communication lines. A common one could be summarized as ‘It’s too horrible over that way
for you to look’. Viewpoints are thus given the understanding that they are surrounded by
horrible things which they have never perceived and which, indeed, have never existed but
which are said to be there so that they will be forced to give attention.
Hidden influences are the commonest methods of enforcing attention. Of course, any
analytical mind is itself a hidden influence since it cannot as itself be perceived. Only its energy
and objects can be perceived. Thus comes about the worship of the hidden influence, the fear
of the hidden influence, the neurosis about hidden influences.
The goal of seeking attention is to receive the particle admiration. One creates effects
simply in order to create effects, but he is given the bonus of admiration when he creates
sufficient effect or, what is most important, when he demands, commands and is able to effect
admiration by duress.
It might be said that there was no eating until one was so furious about not being
admired that one slew as a punishment. The tiger, walking through the woods with his
beautiful stripes, it could be humorously offered, would never have eaten a thing and would
not be eating today if some monkey had not chattered insults at him instead of admiring him.
The tiger compelled the admiration of the monkey by pinning him down and eating him up. It
can be observed that the eating of living flesh or live cells delivers a kind of admiration to the
taste, and it can be observed that under torture, duress of all kinds, the tortured one will
suddenly, if degradedly, admire his torturer.
Energy pictures which we call ‘mock-ups’ are created things which themselves contain
admiration. It could be said that these are prior to bodies. The acquisition of admiration by
pain, by eating, or by devouring something that belongs to somebody else was later succeeded
by a better communications system which would prevent eating on such a rigorous scale. This
thing was sex, which is an interchange of condensed admiration particles which forwards new
bodies into being. So far as the body of homo sapiens is concerned, its desire not to be eaten
has been answered evidently by sex, and sex performs the function of continued survival of
form. Thus, so long as one has the symbol of sex to offer, one feels relatively secure and
when he does not have that symbol to offer, one feels insecure.
But of this evolution of admiration and of evolution itself, we have no high degree of
certainty as we first begin to observe, and it is offered here as an explanation of why it is a
thing we do not particularly need and a thing of which we will or will not gain a future certainty
as we go up the scale of awareness. Many things are non-existent low on the scale. Many
things are uncertain on the scale at low levels, which become high level certainties up on the
91.scale but this certainty only depends on the positiveness of observation or the positiveness of
observation which says the thing does not exist. It is not the purpose of Scientology to present
an uncertainty and then demand that it be accepted, for here is the gradient scale of a process by
which one can become more certain. If there be immortality or even the lack of necessity on the
part of the analytical mind to be a specific object, then one will find it out in due course as he is
processed. If they do not exist, again one will find it out. This would be a matter of progressive
observation. Where a thing exists in the form of an uncertainty it has a tendency to plague the
reactive mind, for the reactive mind itself deals only with uncertainties and its convictions are
based entirely on blows and pain.
A very basic uncertainty comes about on the subject of applause. High on the scale one
performs for an effect and knows that it is an effect, whether or not there is any attention or
admiration, which is to say applause. A little lower on the scale, one desires a nod or the actual
substance of admiration. If it does not come, he is not concerned. But even lower on the scale
the individual actively invites and requests applause. Lower than that, he becomes angry in the
absence of applause. Lower than that, he exhibits fear, grief, and apathy in the lack of
applause. Apathy is the realization that there will never be any applause for any effect.
That which is not admired tends to persist, for the reactive mind does not destroy. One
can become fixed upon producing a certain effect simply by insisting that it be admired. The
longer it is not admired, the longer one is likely to persist in demanding that it be admired,
which is to say exhibiting it, until at length it breaks down scale to a lower level and he realizes
it will not be admired, at which time he becomes the effect of it. Here one has become the effect
of one’s own cause. Here is the psychosomatic illness which began as a pretended infirmity in
order to create an effect. Perhaps it was once applauded but not sufficiently, and after a while
was not applauded at all, and one was forced to applaud it himself and believe it himself and so
it came into existence and was for him a certainty. This, too, is the course of responsibility
which degenerates into irresponsibility. At the top of the scale one knows that he is causing the
effect.
Lower on the scale he says he is not causing the effect (even though he is causing the
effect, only he knows he causes it). Even lower on the scale he does not take the middle step he
causes an effect and instantly believes that something else caused the effect rather than himself
and that he is the effect of the effect.
One can see cause and effect working in terms of viewpoints. If one has not been
applauded for many things, one will begin to take the position of the audience. One does the
trick, creates the thing, and then goes out front, sits down over the whole theater and applauds
it, for one can be a knowing viewpoint from many places. This is often the case with a writer
who is seldom confronted by his readers. Indeed, most editors are so low toned that they cut
off all the admiring letters of a writer and leave him to wonder. As other things influence the
writer, he goes down scale to a point where he believes the things he writes are not admired,
and so he has to go out and sit in the audience. This is the first step to becoming the effect of
his own cause. After a while he thinks he is the audience. When he does this, he is no longer
the writer. Thus with the painter, thus with anyone.
The little child is quite bent on causing effects and getting things admired. He is
continually being evaluated in terms of what is to be admired.
Evaluation is the reactive mind’s conception of viewpoint. The reactive mind does not
perceive, it evaluates. To the analytical mind it may sometimes appear that the reactive mind has
a viewpoint. The reactive mind does not have a viewpoint, it has an evaluation of viewpoint.
Thus the viewpoint of the analytical mind is an actual point from which one perceives.
Perception is done by sight, sound, smell, tactile, etc. The reactive mind’s ‘viewpoint’ is an
opinion based on another opinion and upon a very small amount of observation, and that
observation would be formed out of uncertainties. Thus the confusion of the word viewpoint
itself. It can be a point from which one can be aware, which is its analytical definition, and it
can be somebody’s ideas on a certain subject which is the reactive definition.
92.Because the analytical mind and reactive mind in men can become confused, one with
the other, one is most prone to assume the actual perception point of that person who has most
evaluated for him. Father and mother, for instance, have evaluated about art, habits, goodness,
behavior, badness, how one should dress, what manners are, to such a degree that the child
has no choice, it seems to him, but to assume their ‘points to look from’, and so we will find
the child observing things as his father or mother would observe them and even wearing his
father’s glasses or his mother’s glasses as he grows older. He has confused evaluation with
actual perception. Where he has been told that he is bad looking, ugly, ridiculous, unmannerly,
crude and so forth by somebody else continually, his reactive mind (which, like a prostitute,
cares nothing for its master and serves anyone) eventually causes him to lose his viewpoint of
himself and he sees himself not by observation but by evaluation as something undesirable. Of
course, he would rather be something than nothing. He has, indeed, a horror of being nothing.
So it is better to be something ugly about which he is guessing than to be nothing at all, and so
he persists and continues as he is. Furthermore, because he has been talked to so much about
talking, about looking, about perceiving in general, he has gotten the idea that his
communications system is unalterable. His whole business of living actually is a
communications system with the motivation of causing effects. Thus the lower he is on the tone
scale the more he persists without change except downward.
The characteristic actions of the energy produced by the analytical mind are summarized
above in terms of the top and bottom of the scale. However, the most important of these seem
to be reaching and withdrawing. In the MEST universe, we have start, stop, and change as the
characteristics of motion. The analytical mind, however, with its dimension points, is more
concerned with reaching and withdrawing. This is the way it perceives. It can control by
creating or using energy such as that in the physical universe, and it uses this energy to start,
stop, and change other energy. But in itself, its handling of dimension points direction consists
of reaching and withdrawing. Compulsive reaching, compulsive withdrawing, bring about
many odd and interesting manifestations.
The sensation of pain is actually a sensation of loss. It is a loss of beingness, loss of
position and awareness. Therefore, when one loses anything, he has a tendency to perceive
less, for there is less to perceive. Something has withdrawn from him without his consent.
This would be the definition of loss. This brings about eventually a condition of darkness. This
could also be called an ARC break. If he has lost something, the guilty party is probably in the
other two universes. It is either the physical universe or another’s universe which has caused
the loss. Thus he has less communication since he is unwilling to communicate, which is to
say, put out things in the direction of something which is going to take them and carry them
away without his further consent. This brings about a reduction of the desire to be aware which
is the reduction of affinity, reduction of agreement (reality) and the reduction of communication
in general. In a moment of severe disappointment in one’s fellow man, the universe around him
actually grows dark. Simply as an experiment, one can say to himself that he has the only
viewpoint there is, that all other viewpoints are simply mocked up by him, he will get an almost
immediate diminution of lightness around him. This is the same mechanism as the mechanism
of loss. The result of too much loss is darkness.
Another mechanism of the darkness and unawareness settling over a person is brought
about by the loss of a viewpoint which has greatly evaluated for one. One has had a mother or a
father who over evaluated about everything, and then this parent or guardian or ally in life,
such as a teacher, died or inexplicably disappeared. One was depending for actual looking,
seeing, hearing, upon the continued existence of this individual. Suddenly that individual goes
and all becomes dark. After that one is not able to perceive one’s own universe, for one was
most of the time actually perceiving the lost person’s universe, and now that universe is no
longer there, which gives one the idea that he has no universe to perceive. This even dims his
perception of the physical universe, of course, because of the interdependence of the triangle of
the three universes.
When one has had an insufficient amount of admiration from sexual partners, the
physical body which depends mainly upon sex for its sensation and continuance to almost as
93.great a degree as upon eating, will actually begin to change viewpoint to the other sex. Thus we
find some older men becoming as women, some older women becoming as men.
Thus we get the failure of the androgen and estrogen balances and the resultant decay of
the body. Here in the matter of sex, one finds reaching and withdrawing rising to considerable
magnitude. The reactive mind operating the body conceives itself to be withdrawing and does
not know from what it is withdrawing, for it perceives itself to be under the compulsion of
reaching and does not know for what it is reaching.
In terms of processing, it is withdrawing from or reaching towards sexual partners.
When it withdraws a great deal, or when it has been withdrawn from a great deal, the reactive
mind conceives the body to be covered with blackness. This resolves in terms of sex and
eating. It should be fully understood, however, that this is the resolution of the problem of the
body and this resolution is employed only when the analytical mind cannot be brought itself
into an immediate height of awareness, using SOP 8.
When one addresses the body itself, and only the body, one addresses the subject of
sex and the subject of eating in terms of reaching and withdrawing. The particular processes
used on this are called matched terminalling or double terminalling. This is done in the
following fashion. Even when the individual cannot create forms of his own, he can at least
create two ideas in front of him. He can put a form with an idea or an idea itself facing another
idea out in front of him, both of them exactly alike, ‘withdrawing from sex’, ‘reaching towards
sex’.
He will very often find other terminals he did not create suddenly appearing. When he
has run withdrawing, those things he puts up will be black and the object from which it is
withdrawing will be white. He should get the idea that the whitish object is reaching and the
blackish object is withdrawing.
He should then run this identical terminal as though it is being put up by somebody else
not himself, again with withdrawing for blackness, reaching for greyness. And then he should
run it as though somebody is putting it up for somebody else other than himself.
These three causations of putting up this identical idea facing itself are himself, another
for him, and others for others. This is called Matched Terminalling. Double Terminalling
simply puts up two pairs of matched terminals. The pairs may each be of two different things
but each pair contains one thing the same as the other pair in other words, husband and wife is
one pair and husband and wife is the other pair. These, parallel, give one the two-terminal
effect necessary for a discharge. One will find that these terminals discharge one against the
other.
However, this is a physical body technique and it is limited in use. If one becomes very
ill in doing it, he should turn to what is called later on an unlimited technique or he should do
the next to last list in the book Self Analysis in Scientology and do it over and over, or he
should simply go straight through Short Eight.
It has many remedies. This Matched Terminalling for oneself, others for oneself, and
others for others on the subject of reaching and withdrawing on sex, can of course be
considerably expanded as a technique. It can have in it compulsion to reach, compulsion to
withdraw, compulsion to reach while somebody else is withdrawing compulsion not to reach,
and it can be addressed in terms of all those complexes and things which Sigmund Freud
observed empirically while investigating in his practice.
Sigmund Freud observed, even as you may have observed, that a person’s concern and
trouble with his body commonly began at the age of puberty, and that a curve of his ups and
downs did sudden changes at those points where he was defeated sexually, where his sexual
impotence ceased and where it increased. Dr Freud unfortunately developed no fast or deeply
workable techniques to resolve problems posed by these observations, mainly because the
94.selection of sex as the prime motivator was not the selection of the basic mechanics of
beingness.
However, the brilliance of Freud’s theories and his extrapolations from a limited
amount of data, and his courage in standing before a whole world and declaring that an
unpopular subject was the root of all evil, has no parallel in history. The complexes he
mentioned, each and every one, are discoverable in the mind by direct observation or
electropsychometry and are resolvable in the body by the technique of ‘Matched Terminals in
Brackets’ which is the proper name for the above.
Where the level of the case is Step IV or Step V or below in SOP 8, it is necessary to
free the analytical mind of the grip of the body. The analytical mind cannot withdraw. The body
is most swiftly reduced to compliance by running the second dynamic. This is very far from the
end of all of processing, but it is the fastest method I have developed for remedying occlusion
or accomplishing exteriorization in low step cases. In sex and eating, the body desires to be an
effect most strongly and in these things one does find the strongest desire on the part of the
body in terms of immediate accessiblity. The analytical mind, on the other hand, can create its
own sensation, but it has become dependent upon the body. Even so, it is that part of the
beingness which desires to give sensation rather than receive it. Thus, one has the conflict of
desire to give sensation crossed with the desire to receive sensation on the part of the reactive
mind.
The body’s desire to receive sensation is so strong that an extremely powerful and
persistent uncertainty (‘maybe’) develops, and the primary conflict of the analytical mind and
the body’s reactive mind comes about. I cannot help but give forth my own admiration to a man
who, working without prior art, without electropsychometry, without nuclear physics, without
any broad observation of primitive tribes or ethnology in general, separated from his
conclusion by every convention of his age, yet hit upon and set forth with the weight of logic
alone, the center of disturbance in the human body.
He did not live to see his theory completely validated. He was deserted by his students,
who began to write fantastic theories, completely unworkable and far from the point, which yet
were better accepted.
In discouragement, at the end of his career, he wrote a paper called Psychoanalysis,
Terminable and Interminable. Freud, with no method of direct observation, spoke of pre-natals,
birth trauma, and verbally, if not in writing, of past existences and of the continuing
immortality of the individual. No praise can be great enough to give such a man, and the credit
I give him for my own inspiration and work is entirely without reservation or bounds. My only
regret is that I do not know where he is today to show him his 1894 libido theory completely
vindicated and a Freudian psychoanalysis delivered beyond his expectations in five hours of
auditing.
The analytical mind can be processed directly, and it improves simply by changing its
mind about things. But so long as it believes itself to be closely dependent upon the reactive
mind and the body, it cannot change its opinions. These opinions, however, are not simple
shifts of mind. They are changes of experience.
The analytical mind must discover that it can perceive, that it can perceive accurately in
three universes, that it does not need to be dependent upon the body and that it can handle any
reactive mind. This is done by increasing its powers of perception, increasing the number of
viewpoints it can assume, and increasing its ability to locate spaces, actions and objects in time
and space, and by increasing its ability above that to create space, energy and objects. This is
done by drills and by the procedure of the first three steps of SOP 8.
It should not for one moment be thought that one is trying to perform by the gradient
scale of increasing certainties in Scientology all the tricks and exhibitions of which the ancients
speak. We are not even vaguely interested in moving physical universe objects, throwing
95.lighting about, or in creating solids which can be seen by others. We are only interested in the
rehabilitation of the analytical mind to a point where it can handle any reactive mind, whatever
its proximity to that reactive mind. We are not interested, in other words, in the objective reality
from another viewpoint of the capabilities of the analytical mind in performing various types of
tricks.
Whether it can do these things or not do these things falls into the realm of Para-Scientology,
for it is completely beyond the ability to be certain where the analytical mind is not
processed well up and where the observer is very low on the tone scale. We are not trying to
achieve the certainty of mysticism, necromancy, or, to be blunt, the Indian rope-trick. We are
trying to make sane, well beings.
The analytical mind, when it is in close proximity to the body, is unwittingly
continually restimulating a reactive mind which, some say, evolved through very difficult and
savage stages. just as Freud said, the suppression in the mind is the suppression of things so
bestial, so savage that the preclear undergoing professional processing is extremely shocked.
Almost anything, and almost any impulse, including a thirst for pain and a desire to
create any kind of effect, no matter how bad, will manifest itself while processing the reactive
mind. Cannibalism, purely for sensation, so as to get the last remnants of admiration of the
tortured and dying being, becomes a subjective certainty to the preclear who undergoes
processing and has to have his reactive mind addressed before he can be himself, which is, of
course, his analytical mind. The more suppression his reactive mind gets, the more it
restimulates its beastliness.
The analytical mind is basically good. It has suffered from this proximity to the reactive
mind. It is no wonder that Plato wrote as he did in an essay about the conduct and behavior of
man. It is no wonder that states are completely convinced that man is a beast and must be held
in check at pistol point. The wonder is that in a civilized world, so few crimes are committed.
Our desire is to reach the basic goodness of the individual and bring him into a level of activity
where he does not have to do terrible and gruesome things in order to produce an effect.
There are various levels as one goes up scale where these manifestations seem to be the
all and everything of existence. One becomes completely downhearted at the thought that one
goes upscale simply to get to a point where he can kill and maim and hurt with impunity. One’s
feelings of honor, ethics, all his finer beingness, is revolted at the idea that this is, in actuality,
life. He should say instead that this is life in a stupid conflict of uncertainties. The goal is not to
get above such things and ignore them. The goal is to achieve the basic decency which is
inherent in all of us.
Although I have given you here ‘Matched Terminal Brackets’ on the subject of reach
and withdraw, with particular attention to sex, you must understand that this is a professional
auditor’s technique. The first three steps of SOP 8. when they can be done, can be done by
alert, interested people. From Step IV down, a professional auditor is not simply desirable, he
is completely necessary.
This technique which I have given you here turns on, when one runs its compulsive
aspects, particularly when one must reach and can’t reach, the emotion which we see in
sanatoriums which is called insanity. And although the turn-on is brief and temporary and
would wear away in about three days, an inexperienced auditor could become quite frightened.
Simply by carrying on with the technique or by getting back to unlimited techniques or by
taking Self Analysis with its next to last list, these things could be remedied, but these
techniques walk on the rim of hell where they are addressed to cases below the level of IV.
If the test subject or the preclear cannot make space, which is to say Step III of SOP 8,
let a professional auditor have him. The professional auditor, by using ‘Matched Terminal
Brackets’ of reach and withdraw with attention to sex, will be able to exteriorize this analytical
96.mind and turn on its perceptions. This is skilled work, however, and is a little too shockingly
intimate to the seamier side of life for tender hands and tender minds.
Even the operation of wasting which is contained in expanded GITA is capable of
turning on a vast amount of illness and somatic on the part of the preclear. Expanded GITA is
a limited technique, which is to say it can be audited perhaps only for ten minutes, and at the
most for 50 or 60 hours, without finding the preclear on the down grade. One has to turn to an
unlimited technique such as contained in Short Eight if the preclear becomes too ill trying to
waste things.
Just because an unlimited technique is labelled unlimited is no reason why it is a faint
technique. These unlimited techniques are extremely powerful. They’re very simple, but again,
when one of them becomes too strong for the preclear, it is necessary to turn on to something
simpler and easier.
Simply getting the idea in two places, the idea, so to speak, facing the idea ‘There by
nothing’, will turn on a sick sensation in many preclears. This fear of being nothing is very
great. He will be anything rather than nothing.
A safe technique is that technique which always -- I repeat, always: deals in things of
which the preclear is certain. When one deals with uncertainties, one is dealing with circuits.
One can use double terminalling, which is to say, two pairs of matched terminals, of the
preclear being certain of things.
One never runs things or puts the preclear up against things of which one is uncertain or
of which the preclear is uncertain, if one wishes the preclear to come on up the tone scale. As
an example of this, on any object, thing or idea, on any psychosomatic ill or numb portion of
the body, one has only to run ‘There is something there, there is nothing there’.
Have it saying ‘There is something here, there is nothing here’. One can do a complete
bracket on this, having the numb or painful or injured area saying, ‘There is something here,
there is nothing here’, having it then say, ‘There is something there, there is nothing there’,
having the preclear say about the area, ‘There is something there, there is nothing there’, and
then the preclear about himself, ‘There is something here, there is nothing here’. This makes a
complete bracket. This turns on and off interesting somatics.
A professional auditor could get the somatic or numb area to get the feeling it is
reaching while the preclear is withdrawing, the preclear reaching while it is withdrawing, and
bring about a change in any somatic.
As one is dealing with communications systems, one must realize that communication
depends upon certainty of despatch and receipt, and certainty of what it is that is being
despatched and received. Thus one does not deal in uncertainties. There is something, there is
nothing, are of course, observable certainties because one is top-scale, the other is bottom-scale.
One does not say what the something is and, of course, nothingness needs no
qualifications.
In the case of the person who has been and is trying to become again, one should run
out by concepts the former successes, the triumphs of that person and the times when he was
absolutely certain he had failed. One does this with double terminals or ‘Matched Terminal
Brackets’. This is a professional technique.
It was mentioned to me by Meredith Starr, one of the great mystics from Cyprus, that
Jung had once had a great experience and had sought ever since to recover it. He gave this as
another man’s opinion of Jung. This gives you some clue as to what happens to someone who
has a great triumph. He ever afterwards is not seeking to duplicate the triumph, he is seeking
the triumph itself. This puts him back on the time-track. This is particularly applicable to old
97.people. One hangs, then, on to certainties. The certainties are important. The uncertainties are
important only in their production of psychosis.
It is possible to take a sick animal and rehabilitate his idea that he is dangerous by
dodging every time he strikes out, no matter how faintly, at one. It is possible to rehabilitate an
individual who is very low on the tone-scale merely by coaxing him to reach out and touch the
material universe and, touching it, to be certain that it is there, and having touched it, to
withdraw the touch and to be certain that he could withdraw.
Certainty is a wonderful thing. The road toward realizing what certainty is has led these
investigations through many uncertainties. One had to find out what was, before one could find
out what could be.
That work is done. It is possible to take large groups and, using Short Eight, to bring
them, each and every one, into higher levels of certainty. And bringing them into higher levels
of certainty brings them into higher levels of communication, communication not only with
their own bodies but with others and with the material universe. And as one raises that level of
awareness, one raises also the ability to be, to do, to live.
Today this world suffers from an increasing incidence of neurosis brought about by a
dependency upon mechanical things which do not think, which do not feel but which can give
pain to those that live. It suffers with an overdose of agreement that there is only one universe.
So long as it believes that there is only one universe, that there is only one universe to study, to
be studied, only one universe to agree with, it will continue to seek the lowest end of the scale,
which is to say, that point where all universes become one universe. Where the triangle
vanishes to a single point it vanishes completely, and where one studies but one corner of the
triangle and ignores the other two corners of the triangle, and agrees only with one corner of
the triangle such as the physical universe, one will tend toward that point where that corner of
the triangle is coincident with the other two corners, and this is death.
The curse of this world is not actually its atom bomb, though that is bad enough. The
curse of this world is the irresponsibility of those who, seeking to study but one universe, the
physical universe, try to depress all beings down to the low order of mechanically motivated,
undreaming, unaesthetic things.
Science as a word has been disgraced, for the word science means truth and truth
means light. A continual fixation and dependence upon only one universe while ignoring the
other two universes leads to darkness, to despair, to nothingness. There is nothing wrong with
the physical universe one should not cease to observe the physical universe, but one certainly
should not concentrate upon it so that he can agree with it and its laws only. He has laws of his
own. It is better, far better, for the individual to concentrate upon his own universe than to
concentrate upon the MEST universe, but this in itself is not the final answer. A balance is
achieved in the three universes and certainty upon those universes.
All control is effected by introducing uncertainties and hidden influences. ‘Look how
bad it is over there, so you’ll have to look back at me.’ This slavery is effected solely by getting
people to fix on one thing. That one thing in this case is the physical universe.
Science, so called, today produces machines to blow your nose, produces machines to
think for you, produces every possible argument as to why you should consider your body
frail and unexpendable. Science, under the domination of capital, creates scarcity. It creates a
scarcity of universes in fixing one upon one universe only. Those things which are scarce are
those things which the individual has lost his faith in creating, in having. An individual who
cannot create has to hold on to what he has.
This leads him into holding on to what he has had. Where he has had a certainty in the
past that something existed, he begins to grip it closer and closer to him his space lessens, his
beingness lessens, he becomes less active. The reactive mind that cannot create children, has
98.lost its hope of creation. It then can influence the analytical mind into believing that it can no
longer create. The analytical mind creating artistically in the MEST universe and not in its own
universe at all, and not in other people’s universes that it can recognize, goes down scale until it
meets on its own level the reactive mind. And here at this level we find the enslaver, the person
who makes things scarce, the fellow who uses his ethics, so called, to enforce his crude
judgments and to make things out of beings that could be men.
Here, where the reactive mind and the analytical mind have come into a parity, we have
the only effect that can be produced -- the effect of pain. Where we have an active desire for
pain masking in a thousand guises, where every good impulse high on the scale is turned into a
mockery, here we have crime, here we have war. These things are not awareness. These things
merely act on a stimulus-response mechanism. Up scale is the high, bright breadth of being,
breadth of understanding, breadth of awareness. To get there all one must do is to become
aware of the existence of the three universes by direct observation.
99.STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
STEP I --
Ask preclear to be three feet behind his head. If stable there, have him be in various
pleasant places until any feeling of scarcity of viewpoints is resolved. Then have him be in
several undesirable places, then several pleasant places then have him be in a slightly dangerous
place, then in more and more dangerous places until he can sit in the center of the Sun. Be sure
to observe a gradient scale of ugliness and dangerousness of places. Do not let the preclear fail.
Then do remaining steps with preclear exteriorized.
STEP II --
Have preclear mock up own body. If he does this easily and clearly, have him mock up
own body until he slips out of it. When he is exteriorized and knows it thoroughly (the
condition of all exteriorization) do STEP I. If his mock-up was not clear, go to STEP III
immediately.
STEP III -- SPACATION
Have preclear close his eyes and find upper corners of the room. Have him sit there,
not thinking refusing to think of anything, interested only in the corners until he is completely
exteriorized without strain. Then do a spacation (constructing own space with eight anchor
points and holding it stable without effort) and go to STEP I. If preclear was unable to locate
corners of the room easily with his eyes closed, go to STEP IV.
STEP IV -- EXPANDED GITA.
This is an extension of Give and Take processing Test preclear to see if he can get a
mock-up he can see, no matter how vague. Then have him WASTE, ACCEPT UNDER
DURESS, DESIRE and finally be able to take or leave alone each of the items listed below. He
does this with mock-ups or ideas. He must do the sequence of waste -- etc. in the order given
here for each item. He wastes it by having it at remote distances in places where it will do no
good, being used or done or observed by something which cannot appreciate it. When he is
able to waste it in vast quantities the auditor then has him accept it in mock-up form until he no
longer is antagonistic to having to accept it even when it is unpleasant and great force is applied
to make him take it. Again, with mock-ups, he must be able to bring himself to desire it even in
its worst form then, by mock-ups of it in its most desirable form he must come to be able to
leave it entirely alone or take it in its worst form without caring. EXPANDED GITA remedies
contra-survival abundance and scarcity. It will be found that before one can accept a very scarce
(to him) thing, he has to give it away. A person with a milk allergy must be able to give away,
in mock-up, enormous quantities of milk, wasting it, before he can accept any himself. The
items in this list are compounded of several years of isolating what factors were more important
to minds than others. The list lacks very few of the very important items, if any. Additions to
or subtractions from this list should not be attempted. Viewpoint, Work and Pain should be
heavily and often stressed and given priority.
Waste, Have forced Upon, Desire, Be Able to Give or Take, in that order, each of the
following: (Order of items here is random.) Viewpoint, Work, Pain, Beauty, Motion,
Engrams, Ugliness, Logic, Pictures, Confinement, Money, Parents, Blackness, Police, Light,
Explosions, Bodies, Degradation, Male Bodies, Female Bodies, Babies, Children Male,
Children Female, Strange and Peculiar Bodies, Dead Bodies, Affinity (Love), Agreement,
Beautiful Bodies, People, Attention, Admiration, Force, Energy, Lightning, Unconsciousness,
Problems, Antagonism, Reverence, Fear, Objects, Time, Eating Human Bodies, Sound, Grief,
Beautiful Sadness, Hidden Influences, Hidden Communications, Doubts, Faces, Dimension
Points, Anger, Apathy, Ideas, Enthusiasm, Disagreement, Hate, Sex, Reward, Eating Parents,
Eaten by Mother, Eaten by Father, Eating Men, Eaten by Men, Eating Women, Eaten by
Women, Start, Broken Communications, Written Communications, Stillness, Exhaustion,
100.Stopping Motion Women, Changing Motion Women, Changing Motion Men, Changing
Motion Babies, Changing Motion Children, Starting Motion Men, Starting Motion Women,
Starting Motion Children, Starting Motion Objects, Starting Motion Self, Omens, Wickedness,
Forgiveness, Play, Games, Sound, Machinery, Touch, Traffic, Stolen Goods, Stolen Pictures,
Homes, Blasphemy, Caves, Medicine, Glass, Mirrors, Pride, Musical Instruments, Dirty
Words, Space, Wild Animals, Pets, Birds, Air, Water, Food, Milk, Garbage, Gases, Excreta,
Rooms, Beds, Punishment, Boredom, Confusion, Soldiers, Executioners, Doctors, Judges,
Psychiatrists, Alcoholic Liquor, Drugs, Masturbation, Rewards, Heat, Cold, Forbidden
Things, God, The Devil, Spirits, Bacteria, Glory, Dependence, Responsibility, Wrongness,
Rightness, Insanity, Sanity, Faith, Christ, Death, Rank, Poverty, Maps, Irresponsibility,
Greetings, Farewells, Credit, Loneliness, Jewels, Teeth, Genitalia, Complications, Help,
Pretense, Truth, Lies, Assurance, Contempt, Predictability, Unpredictability, Vacuums, White
Clouds, Black Clouds, Unattainables, Hidden Things, Worry, Revenge, Textbooks, Kisses,
The Past, The Future, The Present, Arms, Stomachs, Bowels, Mouths, Cigarettes, Smoke,
Urine, Vomit, Convulsions, Saliva, Flowers, Semen, Blackboards, Fireworks, Toys,
Vehicles, Dolls, Audiences, Doors, Walls, Weapons, Blood, Ambitions, Illusions, Betrayal,
Ridicule, Hope, Happiness, Mothers, Fathers, Grandparents, Suns, Planets, Moons,
Sensation, Looking, Incidents, Waiting, Silence, Talking, Knowing, Not Knowing, Doubts,
Fac One, Remembering, Forgetting, Auditing, Minds, Fame, Power, Accidents, Illnesses,
Approval, Tiredness, Faces, Acting, Drama, Costumes, Sleep, Holding Things Apart, Holding
Things Together, Destroying Things, Sending Things Away, Making Things Go Fast, Making
Things Appear, Making Things Vanish, Convictions, Stability, Changing People, Silent Men,
Silent Women, Silent Children, Symbols of Weakness, Symbols of Force, Disabilities,
Education, Languages, Bestiality, Homosexuality, Invisible Bodies, Invisible Acts, Invisible
Scenes, Accepting Things Back, Games, Rules, Players, Restimulation, Sexual Restimulation,
Space Reduction, Size Reduction, Entertainment, Cheerfulness, Freedom for Others to Talk,
Act, Feel Pain, Be Sad, Thetans, Personalities, Cruelty, Organizations, TRY FIRST: Healthy
Bodies, Strong Bodies, Good Perception, Good Recall.
WARNING: Should your preclear become unstable or upset doing this process take
him to STEP VI. Then return to this list.
COMMENT: The mind is sufficiently complicated that it can be expected to have
computations on almost all the above. Thus there is no single clearing button and search for it is
at the dictate of a circuit, the mechanism of circuits being to search for something hidden. Thus,
your preclear may begin to compute and philosophize and seek to find the ‘button’ that will
release all this. All this releases all the buttons so tell him to relax and go on with the process
every time he starts to compute.
NOTE: Running the above will bring to the surface without further attention the
‘computation on the case’ and the service facsimile. Do not audit these. Run EXPANDED
GITA.
STEP V -- PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION. EXTERIORIZATION BY SCENERY.
Have preclear, with his body’s eyes, study and see the difference between similar real
objects such as the two legs of a chair, the spaces between the back, two cigarettes, two trees,
two girls. He must see and study the objects. It is not enough to remember the objects. The
definition of a CASE V is ‘no mock-ups, only blackness’. Have him continue this process
until he is alert. Use liberally and often.
Then exteriorize by having the preclear close his eyes and move actual places on Earth
under him, preferably places he has not been. Have him bring these up to him. Find two
similar things in the scene and observe the difference between them. Move him over oceans
and cities until he is certain that he is exteriorized.
Then, preferably while exteriorized, have him do STEP I.
101.This case has to know before he can be. His viewpoint is in the past. Give him present
time viewpoints until he is a STEP I by the methods given for STEP V.
(COMMENT: PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION is a very good general technique
and resolves chronic somatics and improves tone.)
Assume other people’s viewpoints as a drill -- not what they think about things, but as
they look at things in the material universe. Attempt to be in the location of a leaf, blade of
grass, car headlamp, etc., and view the universe.
STEP VI --
ARC STRAIGHT WIRE using next to last list of Self Analysis in Scientology which
asks preclear to recall something really real to him, etc. Then use the list in Self Analysis. This
level is the neurotic. It is identified by the preclear having mock-ups which will not persist or
which won’t go away. Use also PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION. Then go to STEP
IV. At any drop in tone, return case to STEP VI.
STEP VII -- PSYCHOTIC CASES (whether in or out of body).
The psychotic appears to be in such desperate straits that the auditor often errs in
thinking desperate measures are necessary. Use the lightest possible methods. Give case space
and freedom where possible. Have psychotic imitate (not mock up) various things. Have him
do PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION. Get him to tell the difference between things by
actual touch. Have him locate, differentiate and touch things that are really real to him (real
objects or items). If inaccessible, mimic him with own body, whatever he does, until he comes
into communication. Have him locate corners of the room and hold them without thinking. As
soon as his communication is up go to STEP VI, but be very sure he changes any mock-up
around until he knows it is a mock-up, that it exists, and that he himself made it. Do not run
engrams. He is psychotic because viewpoints in present time are so scarce that he has gone into
the past for viewpoints which at least he knew existed. By PRESENT TIME
DIFFERENTIATION, by tactile on objects, restore his idea of an abundance of viewpoint in
present time. If he has been given electric shock, do not process it or any other brutality. Work
him for very brief periods, for his attention span is short. Always work psychotics with
another auditor or a companion present.
NOTE: All steps for all cases. If in doubt as to condition of case, test with STEP VI.
NOTE: An operating thetan must also be able to manufacture particles of admiration and
force in abundance.
102.APPENDIX TO SOP 8 NO. 1
(Any alterations in SOP 8 will appear in appendices as they are expected to be minor
and to make no radical change in the design of the steps in general.)
STEP I --
The Operating Thetan must be able to manufacture and experience to his complete
satisfaction all sensations including pain in mock-up form, and all energies such as admiration
and force. It will be found that some STEP I cases will not be able to manufacture admiration
particles.
STEP II --
Be very careful not to make a lower step preclear, while still in a body, mock up his
own body too long. Any mock-up will appear if it is simply put there often enough and long
enough -- providing the preclear doesn’t spin in the process. The long term manufacture of
mock-ups of one’s own body and of admiration may not produce quite the results expected --
communication lines which should remain shut may open with bad results. These lines that are
shut appear like hard, black cords to the preclear.
There are two types of techniques in general, POSITIVE GAIN and NEGATIVE
GAIN, as defined in the above text. POSITIVE GAIN can be administered in unlimited
amounts without harm. NEGATIVE GAIN techniques such as the reduction of engrams and
locks, double-terminalling, black and white, are often limited in the length of time they can be
given. After a few hundred hours of early type auditing the case could be found to slump.
Thus we have in POSITIVE GAIN the unlimited technique which improves the analytical
mind.
In NEGATIVE GAIN we have a limited (in terms of the time it can be audited)
technique. In SOP 8 the following steps and processes may be audited without limit: STEP I,
STEP III, STEP V, STEP VI, STEP VII. The following steps are limited and should not be
audited many hours without changing to another type (unlimited) for a while, after which the
following steps could be resumed: STEP II, STEP IV.
The following steps can be used on groups: STEP III, STEP V part I and part 2, STEP
VI, STEP VII.
103.APPENDIX NO. 2 SOP 8
CERTAINTY PROCESSING
The anatomy of maybe consists of uncertainties and is resolved by the processing of
certainties. It is not resolved by the processing of uncertainties.
An uncertainty is held in suspense solely because the preclear is holding on so hard to
certainties. The basic thing he is holding on to is ‘I have a solution’ ‘I have no solution’. One
of these is positive, the other is negative. A complete positive and a complete negative are alike
a certainty. The basic certainty is ‘There is something’ ‘There is nothing’. A person can be
certain there is something he can be certain there is nothing.
‘There is something’ ‘There is nothing’ resolves chronic somatics in this order. One
gets the preclear to have the center of the somatic say ‘There is something here’, ‘There is
nothing here’. Then he gets the center of the somatic to say ‘ There is something there’, ‘There
is nothing there’. Then the auditor has the preclear say towards the somatic ‘There is something
there’, ‘There is nothing there’. And then he gets the preclear to say about himself ‘ There is
something here’, ‘There is nothing here’. This is a very fast resolution of chronic somatics.
Quite ordinarily three or four minutes of this will resolve an acute state and fifteen or twenty
minutes of it will resolve a chronic state.
This matter of certainties goes further. It has been determined by my recent
investigations that the reason behind what is happening is the desire of a cause to bring about
an effect. Something is better than nothing, anything is better than nothing. If you will match
terminals in brackets ‘There is nothing’ you will find that a lot of your preclears become very
ill. This should be turned around into ‘There is something’.
The way one does Matched Terminals is to have the preclear facing the preclear or his
father facing his father. In other words, two of each of anything, one facing the other. These
two things will discharge one into the other, thus running off the difficulty. By bracket we
mean, of course, running this with the preclear putting them up as himself as though they were
put up by somebody else, the somebody else facing the somebody else, and the matched
terminal again put up by others facing others.
The clue to all this is positive and negative in terms of certainties. The positive plus the
negative in conflict make an uncertainty. A great number of combinations of things can be run.
Here’s a list of the combinations:
The button behind sex is ‘I can begin life anew’, ‘I cannot begin life anew’, ‘I can make
life persist’, ‘I cannot make life persist’, ‘I can stop life’, ‘I cannot stop life’, ‘I can change
life’, ‘I cannot change life’, ‘I can start life’, ‘I cannot start life’.
A very effective process ‘Something wrong --’, ‘Nothing wrong --’ with ‘you, me,
they, my mind, communication, various allies’.
A very basic resolution of the lack of space of an individual is to locate these people and
these objects which you’ve been using as anchor points such as father, mother and so forth and
putting them into matched terminal brackets with this: ‘There is father’, ‘There is no father’,
‘There is grandfather’, ‘There is no grandfather’. In the compulsive line this can be changed to
‘There must be no father’, ‘There must be a father’. One takes all the allies of an individual and
runs them in this fashion.
The basic law underneath this is that a person becomes the effect of anything upon
which he has had to depend. This would tell you immediately that the sixth dynamic, the MEST
universe, is the largest dependency of the individual. This can be run out, but then any dynamic
can be run out in this fashion. ‘There is myself’, ‘There is no self’ and so on up the dynamics.
‘(Any dynamic) is preventing me from communicating’, ‘(Any dynamic) is not preventing me
104.from communicating’ is intensely effective. Any such technique can be varied by applying the
sub-zero scale as found in Scientology 8-8008 which is also to be found in an earlier issue of
the Journal of Scientology.
One runs any certainty out because he knows that between this certainty there is an
opposite negative certainty and that between these lies a maybe, and that the maybe stays in
suspense in time. The basic operation of the reactive mind is to solve problems. It is based on
uncertainties about observation. Thus one runs out certainties of observation. The MEST
general shotgun technique would have to do with ‘There is sex’, ‘There is no sex’, ‘There is
force’, ‘There is no force’. This could be run, of course, in terms of matched terminal brackets
or even as concepts, but one must not neglect to run the overt act phenomenon, which is to say
getting somebody else getting the concept.
The processing out of certainties would then embrace ‘I have a solution’, ‘There is no
solution’. These two opposite ends would take care of any individual who was hung on the
track with some solution, for that solution had its opposite. People who have studied medicine
begin by being certain that medicine works and end by being certain that medicine doesn’t
work. They begin by studying psychology on a supposition that it is the solution, and finish
up believing that it is not the solution. This also happens to superficial students of Dianetics
and Scientology, thus one should also run ‘Dianetics is a solution’, ‘Dianetics is not the
solution’. This would get one off the maybe on the subject.
We are essentially processing communications systems. The entire process of auditing
is concentrated upon withdrawing communications from the preclear as predicated on the basis
of the body and that the preclear cannot handle communications. Thus ‘The preclear can handle
communications’, ‘The preclear cannot handle communications’ is a shotgun technique which
resolves maybes about his communications.
An intensely interesting aspect of Certainty Processing is that it shows up intimately
where the preclear is aberrated.
Here is the overall basic technique. One runs ‘There is --’, ‘There is not --’ the
following: Communications, Talk, Letters, Love, Agreement Sex, Pain, Work, Bodies,
Minds, Curiosity, Control Enforcement, Compulsion, Inhibition, Food, Money, People,
Ability, Beauty, Ugliness, Presents, and both the top and bottom of the Chart of Attitudes,
positive and negative in each one.
Basic in all this is the urge of the preclear to produce an effect, so one can run ‘I can
produce an effect upon mama’, ‘I cannot produce an effect upon mama’, and so forth for all
allies and one will resolve the fixations of attention on the part of the preclear. Thus fixations of
attention are resolved by Certainty Processing, processing out the production of effect.
One can occasionally, if he so desires, process the direct center of the maybe, which is
to say doubt itself, in terms of Matched Terminals. This, however, is risky for it throws the
preclear into a general state of doubt.
The key to any such processing is the recovery of viewpoints. ‘I can have grandfather’s
viewpoint’, ‘I cannot have grandfather’s viewpoint’ and so on, particularly with sexual
partners, will prove intensely interesting on a case. ‘There are viewpoints’, ‘There are no
viewpoints’, ‘I have a viewpoint’, ‘I don’t have a viewpoint’, ‘Blank has a viewpoint’, ‘Blank
has no viewpoint’ resolves problems.
One should also realize that when one is processing facsimiles, he is processing at one
time energy, sensation and aesthetics. The facsimile is a picture. The preclear is being affected
by pictures mainly, and so ‘There are no pictures’, ‘There are pictures’ forward the case
towards handling pictures, which is to say facsimiles.
105.A person tends to ally himself with somebody whom he considers capable of producing
greater effects than himself, so ‘I, she, he, it can create greater effects’, ‘I, she, he, it can create
no effect’ should be run.
When one is processing, he is trying to withdraw communications. Reach and
Withdraw are the two fundamentals in the action of theta. Must Reach and Can’t Reach, Must
Withdraw and Can’t Withdraw are compulsions which when run in combination, produce the
manifestation of insanity in a preclear.
‘I can Reach’, ‘I can’t Reach’, ‘I can Withdraw’, ‘I can’t Withdraw’ open up into the
fact that remembering and forgetting are dependent upon the ability to reach and withdraw. You
will find that a preclear will respond to ‘You must’ or ‘You can’, ‘You must not’, ‘You
cannot’, ‘There is’, ‘There is not’ forgetting and remembering.
The only reason a person is hanging on to a body or facsimile is that he has lost his
belief in his ability to create. The rehabilitation of this ability to create is resolved, for instance,
in a person who has had an ambition to write with ‘I can write’, ‘I cannot write’ -- and so
forth. The loss of this creative ability made the person hang on to what he had. The fact that a
preclear has forgotten how to, or no longer can himself generate force makes him hold on to
stores of force. These are very often mistaken by the auditor for facsimiles. The preclear
doesn’t care for the facsimile, he simply cares for the force contained in the facsimile because
he knows he doesn’t have any force any more.
It should be kept in mind that reaching and withdrawing are intensely productive of
reaction in a preclear. But that preclear who does not respond to REACHING and
WITHDRAWING and certainty thereon, is hung up in a very special condition: he is trying to
prevent something from happening. He also prevents auditing from happening. He has lost
allies, he has had accidents, and he’s hung up at all those points on the track where he feels he
should have prevented something from happening. This is resolved by running ‘I must prevent
it from happening’, ‘I cannot prevent it from happening’, ‘I must regain control’, ‘I must lose
all control’.
Blackness is the desire to be an effect and the inability to be cause. ‘I can create
grandfather (or ally)’, ‘I cannot create grandfather (or ally)’ solves scarcity of allies. ‘I want to
be aware’, ‘I want no awareness’ is a technique which is basic in attitudes. Run this as others,
in Matched Terminal Brackets or in EXPANDED GITA.
Certainty there is a past, Certainty there is no past Certainty there is a future, Certainty
there is no future Certainty it means something else, Certainty it does not mean anything else
Certainty there is space, Certainty there is no space Certainty there is energy, Certainty there is
no energy Certainty there are objects, Certainty there are no objects.
106.SHORT 8
This is a short form of STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE 8 of Scientology 8-
8008. It can be used on any preclear without any survey of the case and will not get him into
any difficulties and should resolve his various computations. This can also be used on groups.
Just do the lettered steps in order.
(A) Next to last in Self Analysis Remembering Something Real etc., until auditor is
certain preclear has and can do so easily. In a group ask for a show of hands the moment
something real is recalled. Take those hands that went up in a couple of seconds and use them
for the rest of this. Take the no-hands or slow hands as a special group under somebody else
and simply drill them on this step until their speed is well up. Then put them back into the main
group, or keep all in one group and so on.
(B) Examine and compare two similar MEST objects or spaces and tell the difference.
Keep this up for at least 20 minutes. It can be kept up for hours with astonishing case
improvement.
(C) Run WASTING HEALTHY BODIES, then ACCEPTING THEM UNDER
DURESS, then WASTING THEM, then ACCEPTING THEM UNDER DURESS. Do this
for 20 minutes or an hour until preclear or group shows signs of relief or amusement.
(D) Run next to the last list of Self Analysis for five minutes.
(E) Run DUPLICATION. This process is the basis of making facsimiles. Have preclear
or group look at a MEST object, then have him or them mock up a mock-up similar to it but
beside it. Have the MEST object and the mock-up compared to tell the difference. Some people
get none of the duplicates for quite a while but will eventually. Some start making much fancier
objects of the same sort. In any result, keep this up for 20 minutes.
(F) Have preclear or group close eyes and locate the corners of the room behind them
and keep interested in those corners and not thinking for several minutes.
(G) Have preclear or group move MEST scenery under them individually but at the
command of the auditor. The scenery is, preferably, that not before viewed by the preclear or
preclears. Don’t let them invalidate what they see. This is Exteriorization by Scenery. Keep up
for 20 minutes.
(H) Do next to last list of Self Analysis 5 minutes.
(I) Examine and compare two present time objects.
(J) Have one of the members go to the window and look out of the window. Have the
remainder of the group assuming his Viewpoint to see what he sees out of the window. Do this
for 10 minutes.
(K) Start at beginning again and use list over and over. What they waste each time
through can be changed to work and anchor points. Avoid pain with this Short 8. Run ‘healthy
bodies’ for it instead.
SOP 8 is a professional auditor technique which deals with the problems of the reactive
mind. SOP 8 from STEP IV down and including STEP IV is a professional auditor technique.
SHORT EIGHT is done by someone who has been trained, preferably by a professional
auditor. It can be done on a group no matter how large. SELF ANALYSIS IN
SCIENTOLOGY is a group technique aimed at the rehabilitation of one’s own universe so as to
bring it up to a level of comparability with one’s observations of the MEST universe, and can
be delivered to groups of children or adults by a person trained only through the text of SELF
107.ANALYSIS IN SCIENTOLOGY. Associates have courses in group auditing which are given
free of charge and which consist of six hours of tape lectures by L. Ron Hubbard on the
administration of SELF ANALYSIS IN SCIENTOLOGY and the general techniques of group
auditing.
108.SOP 8-C: THE REHABILITATION OF THE HUMAN SPIRIT
Scientology, the science of knowing how to know, has been developed for various
applications in the field of human experience.
Where it is utilized by skilled persons to enhance the personal ability and knowledge of
others, a recommended process is Standard Operating Procedure 8 C.
SOP 8-C was developed after almost a year of observing SOP 8 in action in other hands
than mine, and after observing the frailties and talents of human auditors. SOP 8-C might be
called SOP 8 modified for clinical, laboratory, and individual human applications.
The goal of the system of operation is to return to the individual his Knowledge, Skill
and Knowingness, and to enhance his perception, his reaction time and serenity.
It is entirely incidental that SOP 8-C is effective on ‘psycho-somatic’ illness, on human
aberration and social difficulties. It is not the intent or purpose of Scientology to repair. The
science is a creative science. If the fact that human illness, disability and aberration uniformly
cease to be, because of Scientology, the effect is not intended to be primary and the goal of
SOP 8-C is not their remedy. Indeed if SOP 8-C is used to remedy these only, it fails as a
system. SOP 8-C succeeds only when it is addressed towards higher knowingness and
beingness -ironically, in using it, human ills vanish only when the Auditor concentrates on the
goals of the system and neglects the obvious physical disabilities of the preclear.
In that one creates that which one concentrates upon, a treatment of illness which
validates it in treatment will always tend to be unsuccessful.
SOP 8-C was the subject of the Camden Indoctrination Course B, from 16 November
to 23 December, as well as the subject of the Phoenix International Congress of 28 December
1953.
Specifically, the use of these processes obtain, when correctly used, without further
evaluation for, or indoctrination of the preclear, the knowledge that he is not a body, that he is a
creative energy-production unit, and demonstrates to him his purposes and abilities.
This energy-space production unit we call a ‘thetan’, that being a coined word taken
from a mathematical symbol, the Greek letter ‘theta’. This is the preclear. One does not send
‘one’s thetan’ anywhere. One goes as a thetan. When a preclear is detected being in one place
and finding ‘his thetan’ in another (‘I’m over there’) he is not exteriorized. To be ‘exteriorized’
the preclear must be certain that he is outside his body. An uncertain ‘exteriorization’ requires
more work before it becomes an exteriorization.
SOP 8-C brings about a condition designated as ‘theta clear’. This is a relative, not an
absolute term. It means that the person, this thought unit, is clear of his body, his engrams, his
facsimiles, but can handle and safely control a body.
The state of Operating Thetan is higher than Theta Clear and means that the person does
not need a body to communicate or Work. It is accomplished with SOP 8-C.
The highest theory of SOP 8-C is that the being is engaged upon a game called Physical
Universe. This is a game requiring barriers, which is to say, walls, planets, time and vast
distances (which last two are also barriers). In engaging upon this game he has at last become
so conscious of barriers that he is limited in his actions and thoughts. He thinks, in the case of
homo sapiens, that he is a body (a barrier) hemmed in by vast distances (barriers) and pinned in
a time-stream (a system of moving barriers) so as to reach only the present. These combined
barriers have become so formidable that they are not even well-perceived, but from being
109.strong have become unreal to him. The matter is further complicated by ‘invisible barriers’ such
as the eyes or glasses.
In actuality, the thetan is a knowingness, total in a cleared state, who yet can create
space and time and objects to locate in them. He reduces his knowingness only to have action.
Knowingness is reduced by assuming that one cannot know or knows wrongly. Knowingness
is reduced by assuming one must be in certain places to perceive and so know and that one
cannot be in certain places.
Space is, but does not have to be, the first barrier of knowingness. With Scientology
we have the first definition of space -- Space is a viewpoint of dimension. Given a viewpoint
and four, eight or more points to view, one has space. Space is a problem of observation, not
of physics.
There is no question here of whether space, energy or objects are real. Things are as
real as one is certain of their reality. Reality is, here on Earth, agreement as to what is. This
does not prevent barriers, or time from being formidably real. It does not mean either that
space, energy or time are illusions. It is as one knows it is. For one makes, by a process of
continuous automatic duplication, all that one perceives. So much for theory -- in application
this theory obtains results of considerable magnitude in changing beingness.
The thetan is continuously engaged upon cycles of action. The basic cycle of action is
‘Create, resist effects (survive) and Destroy’. This can be stated in various ways: ‘Create an
object, have it resist effects (survive) and then destroy it’. Or, ‘Create a situation, continue it
and change it, and destroy or end it’. When a thetan leaves a cycle which is important to him
unfinished, he tends to strive to finish it elsewhere or later in disrelated circumstances.
Further, he can become overly concentrated upon creating or persistence (surviving) or
upon destroying and so form an unbalanced state of beingness.
Time exists in those things a thetan creates. It is a shift of particles, always making new
space, always at an agreed-upon rate. A thetan does not change in time, but as he can view
particles (objects, spaces, barriers) from many viewpoints, he can consider himself to be in a
‘time-stream’ which he is not. A thetan’s ideas (postulates, commands, beliefs) change
particles change the thetan does not change either in space or in time.
Just as he is making an effort to do something he cannot help but do -survive -- he is
also fighting against doing the only thing he does -- sit fixed in one ‘position’.
The thetan, to produce interest and action, operates as a paradox. He cannot die so he
firmly insists and proves continually that he can die. He never changes location but only views
new locations and constantly lives in horror of being fixed in time and space. Above that, he
knows the past and the future and all of the present, and so fights to obscure the past and guess
the future.
Less theoretically, the individual who is processed is at first, usually, ‘in’ the body and
perceiving with the body’s eyes. When exteriorized (placed ‘three feet back of his head’), he is
actually out of the body and still ‘in’ physical universe space. He can, exteriorized, move about
and be in places just as though he had a body, seeing without eyes, hearing without ears, and
feeling without fingers -- ordinarily better than with these ‘aids’. This is not like ‘astral
walking’ which is done by the individual who ‘sends a body’ or a viewpoint to some other
place and perceives with it. A thetan is as much present where he is as if he were there in body.
He isn’t ‘somebody else’ than the preclear moving dimly about. He is the preclear, he is there.
At first he may be uncertain as to what he is seeing. This faculty becomes better as his ability to
look, hear and feel while exteriorized improves. SOP 8-C improves this perception.
Because the body only perceives what the thetan is perceiving anyway, looking, feeling,
hearing of the body is also better with SOP 8-C but this is only incidental.
110.When a thetan believes too thoroughly he is a body, he is generally unhappy, afraid,
doubts his own (and validates the body’s) existence and worries about his inabilities. When he
is out of the sphere of influence of the body (a very small one) he becomes serene, confident
and knowing. He can handle a body better, can act faster, can recall more and do more while
exteriorized than he can while in a body.
Society, thirsting for more control of more people substitutes religion for the spirit, the
body for the soul, an identity for the individual and science and data for truth. In this direction
lies insanity, increasing slavery, less knowingness, greater scarcity and less society.
Scientology has opened the gates to a better World. It is not a psycho-therapy nor a
religion. It is a body of knowledge which, when properly used, gives freedom and truth to the
individual.
It could be said that Man exists in a partially hypnotized state. He believes on other-determinism
in many things, to his detriment, He will be as well as he is self-determined. The
processes of Scientology could be described as methods of ‘unhypnotizing’ men to their own
freer choice and better life.
111.THE USE OF SOP 8-C
This process is designed to be administered by one person (the Auditor) to another (the
preclear).
SOP 8-C is first used step by step from STEP I on until the person to whom it is
addressed knows he is back of his head and no longer in the body. If the preclear is very
difficult to exteriorize, the person should be referred to an Auditor trained at the HASI Clinical
Center (for there are special methods of exteriorization for difficult cases which are contained in
but are not at once visible in SOP 8-C). The first three steps are exteriorization steps. They
should be repeated over and over until certain exteriorization takes place.
The Auditor can go through the first steps many times one after the other with the
preclear until exteriorization occurs. Doing STEPS IV to VII on a person not exteriorized
should be minimized. (Earlier SOP’s used all seven steps for exteriorization, a practice not
followed in SOP 8-C where only the first three steps are used.)
When the preclear has exteriorized one then begins again with STEP I and continues to
STEP VII in order with the preclear exteriorized. Here in SOP 8-C, the emphasis is upon an
exteriorized thetan. When the Auditor has taken the exteriorized preclear thoroughly, and
correctly through STEPS I to VII at least twice, one has then what may be considered a theta
clear.
To repeat, one uses SOP 8-C STEPS I to III in that order. On one of these, the first
time through, the majority of people exteriorize with certainty. As soon as exteriorization takes
place, the Auditor starts with STEP I again, does it thoroughly on the exteriorized preclear,
then the Auditor applies STEP II thoroughly and so on until all seven are done.
The Auditor knows when the preclear exteriorizes by asking him or by the preclear
volunteering the information.
CAUTION: Do not ask the preclear to look at his body.
If the preclear fails to exteriorize sometime during the first three steps, the Auditor
should simply do them again. If the preclear fails the second time, the Auditor patiently goes
through them a third time, and so on. If the matter then seems too difficult, contact an Auditor
trained during late 1954 at London, by the HASI itself.
The least possible result in going over these first three steps many times will be a
considerably bettered condition of the preclear, superior to all past results. Only a very few
preclears fail to exteriorize after STEPS I to III have been several times repeated.
CAUTION: Although this process is as foolproof as it can be made, it can be
maliciously used in this wise -- by giving the preclear constant losses -by giving him no chance
to win -- by bullying him -- by evaluating for him -by insisting he is ‘outside’ when he is not --
by invalidating him -- by pretending to see him or his mock-ups or saying that one does if he
does.
112.SOP 8-C FORMULAS AND STEPS OPENING PROCEDURE
(10 minutes to two hours -- with MEST body.)
(A) Send preclear to exact places in room, one place at a time.
(B) Have preclear select places in the room and move to them one at a
time, still under auditor’s direction.
(C) Have preclear drill in physically holding on to and letting go of objects and spaces on his
own decision to hold on, decision to let go.
STEP I: LOCATION
PRE-LOGIC: Theta orients objects in space and time.
AXIOM: In life experience space becomes beingness.
FORMULA I: Permitting the preclear to discover with certainty where people and things are not
in the present, past and future recovers sufficient orientation to establish his knowledge and
certainty of where he is and they are the application of this is accomplished by negative
orientation of beingness, havingness and doingness on each of eight dynamics in the present,
past and future.
STEP I
(A) Ask preclear to be three feet back of chair. Ask him for things,
people, which are not giving him directions (orders). For things, persons, he is not giving
orders to. For things, persons, which are not giving directions to other things. Ask preclear for
goals he does not have. For goals others do not have for others. For goals another does not
have for him. For goals he does not have for another. For persons he is not. For animals he is
not. For places where he is not. Where bacteria is not. Where objects are not. For places where
he is not thinking.
NOTE: All of the above are done in ‘brackets’ for present, past, and
future.
(B) If exteriorized. Have him drill while exteriorized into holding on to and letting go of objects
on his specific decision. Ask him to be in places which are safe, dangerous, pleasant,
unpleasant, beautiful, ugly.
STEP II: BODIES
AXIOM: In life experience energy becomes doingness.
AXIOM: Compulsive position precedes compulsive thinking.
AXIOM: That which changes the preclear in space can evaluate for him.
FORMULA II: Permit the preclear to discover that he handles bodies and allow him to handle
bodies in mock-ups and actuality and remedy his thirst for attention which he has received by
contagion from bodies.
STEP II
(A) Have preclear mock up bodies and unmock them. Have him get somethingnesses and
nothing nesses of bodies until he feels better about them. Ask him to be three feet back of
chair.
(B) If exteriorized. Have him complete II-A many times and then move body while he is
outside.
STEP III: SPACE
PRE-LOGIC: Theta creates space and time and objects to locate in them.
DEFINITION: Space is a viewpoint of dimension.
AXIOM: Energy derives from imposition of space between terminals and a reduction and
expansion of that space.
FORMULA III: Permit the preclear to regain his ability to create space and impose it upon
terminals, to remove it from between terminals and to regain his security concerning the
stability of MEST space.
STEP III
(A) Have preclear hold two back corners of room and not think.
(B) If exteriorized. Have preclear complete spacation.
NOTE: If not exteriorized return to STEP I.
113.STEP IV: HAVINGNESS
AXIOM: In life experience matter becomes havingness.
OBSERVATION: To a thetan, ANYTHING is better than nothing.
OBSERVATION: Any preclear is suffering from problems of too little havingness and any
reduction of his existing energy, if not replaced, will cause him to drop in tone.
FORMULA IV:
(A) The remedy of problems of havingness is accomplished by creating an abundance of all
things.
(B) As the preclear has rendered automatic his desires and ability to create and destroy, and has
thus placed havingness beyond his control, the Auditor should place in the control of the
preclear his automaticities of havingness and unhavingness and permit him, on his own self-determinism,
to balance his havingness.
(C) How to make havingness: Have preclear put out eight anchor points of size, thus creating a
space. Have him pull in these eight to the center and have him retain the resulting mass. Do this
using large and various objects for anchor points. Do this until he is willing to release such old
energy deposits as engrams and ridges but still continue to make havingness.
STEP IV
Have preclear remedy problems of havingness by mocking up and pulling together sets of eight
anchor points. Do this many times. Do not have him make anchor points explode in this
fashion. Have him save masses thus created. Have preclear adjust anchor points in body.
STEP V: TERMINALS
AXIOM: Space exists by reason of anchor points.
DEFINITION: An anchor point is any particle or mass or terminal.
AXIOM: Energy is derived from mass by fixing two terminals in proximity in space.
AXIOM: Self-determinism is related to the ability to impose space between terminals.
AXIOM: Cause is a potential source of flow.
AXIOM: Effect is a potential receipt of flow.
AXIOM: Communication is the duplication of the receipt point of that which emanated at a
cause point.
AXIOM: Wrongness in terms of flow is inflow.
FORMULA V: The thetan is rehabilitated as to energy and terminals by remedying his
postulates about outflow and inflow and drills relating to the outflow and inflow of energy
according to the above axioms.
STEP V
(A) Ask preclear for times he could do something. Times when he couldn’t do anything. For
things he can do. For things he can’t do. For things other people can, can’t do. For things
other people can do for others. For things another specific person can’t do for him. For things
he cannot do for another or others.
(B) Ask preclear for objects, actions, persons, ideas he is not destroying. For objects, actions,
persons, ideas he is not making survive (persist). For objects, actions, persons, ideas he is not
creating. Present, past, and future in brackets. (NOTE: Ideas are the most important here, in
brackets.)
(C) Ask preclear for objects, persons, energies, times which are not touching him. Which he is
not touching. Which are not reaching for him. For which he is not reaching. For objects,
persons, times from which he is not withdrawing. Which are not withdrawing from him. In
brackets.
(D) Ask preclear for sights which will not blind him. For people he will not blind if they see
him. For noises which will not deafen him. For people he will not deafen. For spoken words
that will not hurt him. For spoken words which will not hurt others. In brackets.
(E) Ask preclear for ideas that will not destroy, cause to survive (persist), create, or upset
others. In brackets.
(F) Ask preclear for ideas, sounds, sights that will not fix people or unfix them from specific
places.
(G) Ask preclear for ideas he is not trying to fix in things. For ideas he is not trying to unfix
from things. In brackets.
(H) Have him unmock and mock up terminals and move them together and apart until he can
make them generate currents.
114.STEP VI: SYMBOLIZATION
DEFINITION: A symbol is an idea fixed in energy and mobile in space.
FORMULA VI: The thetan who has been moved about by symbols is strengthened by mocking
up and moving about and fixing in space ideas which have formerly moved him.
STEP VI
Have preclear create symbols which mean nothing. Ask PC for ideas he is not trying to
destroy. For ideas he is not trying to make survive (persist). For ideas he is not trying to create.
NOTE: The above are done in brackets. Have him mock up ideas and move them about.
STEP VII: BARRIERS
AXIOM: The MEST universe is a game consisting of barriers.
DEFINITION: A barrier is space, energy, object, obstacles, or time.
FORMULA VII: Problems of barriers or their lack are resolved by contacting and penetrating,
creating and destroying, validating and neglecting barriers by changing them or substituting
others for them, by fixing and unfixing attention upon their somethingness and nothingness.
STEP VII
(A) Have preclear reach and withdraw (physically then as himself) from
spaces, walls, objects, times.
(B) Have preclear do six ways to ‘nothing’.
(C) Have him create and destroy barriers.
STEP VIII: DUPLICATION FUNDAMENTAL: The basic action of existence is
duplication.
LOGIC: All operating principles of life may be derived from duplication.
AXIOM: Communication is as exact as it approaches duplication.
AXIOM: Unwillingness to be cause is monitored by unwillingness to be duplicated.
AXIOM: Unwillingness to be an effect is monitored by unwillingness to duplicate.
AXIOM: An inability to remain in a geographical position brings about an unwillingness to
duplicate.
AXIOM: An enforced fixation in a geographical position brings about an unwillingness to
duplicate.
AXIOM: Inability to duplicate on any dynamic is the primary degeneration of the thetan.
AXIOM: Perception depends upon duplication.
AXIOM: Communication depends upon duplication.
AXIOM: In the MEST universe, the single crime is duplication.
FORMULA VIII: The primary ability and willingness of the thetan to duplicate must be
rehabilitated by handling desires, enforcements and inhibitions relating to it on all dynamics.
STEP VIII
(A) Ask preclear for actions, forms and ideas which do, do not, duplicate specific other people.
For actions, forms, ideas by which specific other people do, do not duplicate specific other
people. For actions, forms, ideas of others which do, do not, duplicate him.
(B) Have preclear duplicate physical objects and people and possess himself of duplicates.
(C) Have him make ‘no-duplicates’ of objects and people.
(D) Have him duplicate somethings and ‘nothings’.
GROUP C
‘Group C’ is a process used on large numbers of people. It is composed of the following steps
of SOP 8-C: STEP 1-A, STEP II-A, STEP III-A, STEP V-A to H, STEP VI, STEP VII,
STEP VIII.
115.GLOSSARY
PC: Stands for ‘preclear’, a person being processed.
MOCK-UP: A self-created image the preclear can see.
BRACKET: Is done as follows: for preclear, for another, others for others, others for
self, another for preclear, preclear for another. See STEP IA.
SPECIAL NOTE: The first three steps of SOP 8-C could be classified as beingness
steps. The remaining five steps of SOP 8-C could be classified as havingness steps. SOP,
itself, in all eight steps constitutes doingness, thus approximating as described in ‘Scientology
8-8008’ the space-be, energy-do, time-have triangle.
SPECIAL NOTE: In its entirety, SOP 8-C could be considered as various exercises in
FORMULA H which involves the most basic action of the thetan which is reaching and
withdrawing.
SPECIAL NOTE: It will be noted that the negative orientation techniques are done in
such a way as to make the preclear, without his being told to do so, create space. The auditor
should pay specific attention when the preclear is discovering where things are not that the
preclear be caused to note specifically each time the exact location and position where the thing
does not exist. This calls the preclear’s attention to various positions which in themselves, thus
located, create space. Thus, throughout SOP 8-C, the rehabilitation of space is also to be
found, the definition of space being ‘space is a viewpoint of dimension’.
SPECIAL NOTE: In his auditing, if the Auditor does not get a communication change
on the part of the preclear, whether better or worse, every five or ten minutes, either the
Auditor is using the wrong step at the time, in which case he should progress on into the steps
or the preclear, even if he says he is, is not complying with the Auditor’s orders. The Auditor,
thus, should remain in continuous communication with the preclear so far as possible and
should ascertain with great care what the preclear is doing after he indicates that he has
complied with the direction and to discover every five or ten minutes if there has been a change
in certainties or communication. The commonest source of failure in any step in SOP 8-C is a
failure on the part of the preclear to execute the orders given as it was intended to be executed,
or on the part of the Auditor in failing to ascertain whether or not the preclear is executing
properly or if there has been a communication change. A careful check of Auditors and
preclears utilizing SOP 8-C has demonstrated in each case where its use was becoming lengthy
that the Auditor was failing to ascertain from the preclear whether or not there had been
communication changes, and it was also uniformly discovered that the preclear who was failing
to get results while being audited with SOP 8-C was not doing the steps as directed but was
either avoiding by not doing them at all although he said he was doing them or was failing to
understand the direction and so was executing the step in some other way.
The first goal which an Auditor must achieve is willingness in the preclear to receive
directions. The condition of the preclear is such, in nearly all cases, that he has chosen as a
main point of resistance in life, direction of himself other than his own. Because the physical
universe is designed to resist and overcome that which resists it, a continuous resistance to
other direction than one’s own results finally in a loss of ability to greater or lesser degree to
direct oneself. In that it is the ability to direct himself which the Auditor is seeking to return to
the preclear, it must be demonstrated to the preclear solely by the process of good auditing that
other direction is not necessarily harmful or in the worst interest of the preclear. Thus, to some
degree, he ceases to resist incoming direction, and by ceasing to resist it, no longer validates it
as a barrier, and so is not concentrating attention on resisting direction but is able to use it freely
in his own self-direction. The self-determinism of a preclear is proportional to the amount of
self-direction he is capable of executing and deteriorates markedly when a great deal of his
attention is devoted to preventing other direction. Directing himself, the preclear becomes
116.capable of execution preventing direction of himself (resisting the direction of others) brings
about a condition where he is mainly devoted to resisting his environment. The latter results in
a diminishing of space of the preclear.
The first step in the rehabilitation of the preclear in self-direction is therefore a limiting
of the amount of resistance he is concentrating on ‘other direction’ and demonstrating to him
that his following of the steps of SOP 8-C under the direction of an Auditor is not harmful but,
on the contrary, increases his command and control of himself and brings him at last to the
point where he can neglect and ignore the continuous stimulus response operation of the
physical universe.
It can be seen clearly then that the Auditor who sets himself up to be resisted will fail,
for the preclear is mainly concentrating upon resisting the Auditor. This is the primary factor in
all auditing.
The preclear is brought to a point of co-operation in terms of direction without the use
of hypnosis or drugs and without argument or ‘convincingness’ on the part of the Auditor, by
which is meant overbearing demeanor. At the same time it should be the sole intention and
operation of the Auditor that his own directions be carried out explicitly by the preclear, and
that these be performed with a minimum of communication break and with a maximum of
affinity, communication and reality.
Using the formula that that which changes the individual’s position in space can
evaluate for the individual, the Auditor in using SOP 8-C should use, at the beginning of the
first session and in any session where the preclear becomes unreasonably uncooperative in
following simple directions, the following procedure. The Auditor has the preclear walk to
specific points in the room, touch, hold and let go of various specific objects. The Auditor
should be very exact in his directions. The Auditor should do this even on an apparently co-operative
case at least twenty minutes before going on to the next step in Opening Procedure.
When the preclear, drilled in this fashion, has at length realized without being told that
the Auditor’s directions are quiet, reliable, exact and to be performed and not until then uses
this process:
Preclear is asked to send himself to various parts of the room and do specific things.
The Auditor is very specific and exact about this, in that he has the preclear decide on his own
determinism and, before moving from the spot where he is standing, what part of the room he
is going to send himself to. When the preclear has decided this, and only then (but not
necessarily telling the Auditor), the preclear then takes himself to that part of the room. The
Auditor must be very exact that the decision to go to a certain part of the room and to reach or
withdraw from a certain thing is made before the preclear takes an actual action. And then the
Auditor should make sure that the preclear has done exactly what he decided he would do
before he moved. In such a wise, coached by the Auditor, the preclear is led to direct himself to
various parts of the room until he is entirely sure that he is directing himself to certain parts of
the room and that the orders are coming from nobody but himself. Of course, before each new
place is chosen, the Auditor tells the preclear to choose a new place and tells him when to go
there.
The third stage of this Opening Procedure is then as follows:
The Auditor has the preclear be in one spot in the room and then has the preclear decide
there to go to another spot in the room. The preclear leaves. The Auditor has the preclear
change his own mind, and go to yet another spot. This last is done to lessen the preclear’s fear
of changing his mind, to strengthen his decision and to lessen his reaction to his own mistakes.
The last two steps of Opening Procedure are done at some length. It is profitable by the
experience of many Auditors to spend as much as an hour on Opening Procedure even in a case
which is not in poor condition. When Opening Procedure is omitted or is not carried on far
117.enough, the Auditor may discover that it will take him from five to ten hours to ‘get the case
working’. This time is saved by the expenditure of much less time in using Opening Procedure.
Even when the preclear is complacent, even when the preclear is an obvious ‘STEP 1’, even
when the preclear shows no outward sign of resistance to other direction than his own, the first
communication lag lessening which the Auditor will perceive on the case will probably occur
during the use of Opening Procedure. Further, the certainty of the case is heightened. Further,
Opening Procedure is, for any level of case, an excellent process.
The preclear who is familiar with SOP 8 may conceive that he is doing a step which is
‘reserved for psychotics’. The preclear should be disabused of such a concept, since the step is
used today on all cases.
In the case of a preclear who is very resistive, Opening Procedure can be used with
considerable profit for many hours. For such activity, however, an auditing room of the usual
dimensions is usually too constrictive and the drill may be carried on as well out of doors even
if only on a street.
118.GROUP PROCESSING
For successful group processing the following are near absolutes.
1. The group auditor must be able to grant beingness to the group. Stage fright and
timid commands have no place in group auditing. An auditor who is afraid of a group will ‘Q
and A’ with the group (as soon as it gets an effect, he changes the process -- he changes
commands when the group changes aspect).
2. Commands must be simple, clear, concise, evenly spaced, without sudden breaks of
pace or jarring interjections of loudness.
3. The processes should be objective, addressing the environment not the thinkingness
of the group. Opening Procedure, adapted to a group, run long enough, would exteriorize
everyone present.
4. Every command given should be run long enough to flatten every communication lag
present.
5. Every process used should be run long enough consecutively to ‘flatten’ the process
itself.
6. The Auditor’s Code in full should be obeyed. If these rules are vigorously followed,
good results can be attained in group processing.
Here are some standard processes for groups. Each is a one hour session.
SESSION 1: ‘Spot some spots on the front wall.’ ‘Spot some more spots’, ‘Spot some
more spots’, and so on for some time. Then: ‘Spot some spots on the floor’, ‘Spot some more
spots on the floor’, and so on for some time. Then: ‘Without turning around, spot some spots
on the back wall’, ‘Some more spots’, and so on. Then spot spots on the front wall again, then
the floor, then the back wall. If the ceiling is used in this their necks get tired very quickly.
SESSION 2: Spot some spots in your body.’ Pause. ‘Spot some spots in the room.’
Pause. ‘Spot some spots in your body.’ Pause. ‘Spot some spots in the room.’ Alternate these
two commands for at least one hour.
SESSION 3: ‘Examine your chair.’ Pause. ‘Examine the floor.’ Pause. ‘Examine your
chair.’ Pause. ‘Examine the floor’, and alternate these for at least one hour.
SESSION 4: ‘Where’s your face?’ Pause. ‘Where’s your face?’ Pause. ‘ Where’s your
face?’ Pause, and so on for at least one hour.
SESSION 5: ‘Start laughing.’ Pause. ‘Keep on laughing.’ Pause. ‘Laugh.’ Pause.
‘Keep on laughing.’ just these for at least an hour.
SESSION 6: ‘Where are you?’ Pause. ‘Where are you?’ Pause. ‘Where are you?’
Pause. For at least one hour.
SESSION 7: A very arduous one. OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION.
Have each person in the group hold two objects, one in each hand. Be very sure, as an auditor,
not to vary your commands. ‘Call the object in your left hand Object One. Call the object in
your right hand Object Two.’ ‘Look at Object One. What is its color? Temperature? Weight?’
‘Look at Object Two. What is its color? Temperature? Weight?’ ‘Look at Object One. What is
its color? Temperature? Weight?’ ‘Look at Object Two. What is its color? Temperature?
Weight?’ Use these over and over for at least an hour. Never give less than an hour of
119.OPENING PROCEDURE BY DUPLICATION -- never do it for only half an hour, much less
fifteen minutes. This is the first step of what Scientologists call ‘Dirty 30’.
For the convenience of the auditor, this list is given:
OBJECT ONE: Color Temperature Weight
OBJECT TWO: Color Temperature Weight.
SESSION 8: This is very arduous. DUPLICATION BY ATTENTION. Put up two
black pieces of material somewhat above eye level, at least ninety degrees apart from the
preclear. Hang them up on the walls, ahead of the group so all can see them. (One on the
forward right wall, one on the forward left wall is best.) Describe them to the group as Object
One and Object Two. ‘Put your attention on Object One.’ ‘Now put your attention on Object
Two.’ ‘Now put your attention on Object One.’ ‘Now put your attention on Object Two.’ Do
this without variation for at least an hour. On duplication processes, somebody in the audience
usually claims this is ‘hypnotism’, for it runs out hypnotism. It induces no trances. People who
think so simply don’t know much about hypnotism.
SESSION 9: This is in four parts. Do each part exactly fifteen minutes. It is run with
the group’s eyes closed. ‘Find the two back corners of the room, hold on to them, and don’t
think.’ The auditor repeats this quietly and reassuringly every few minutes until fifteen minutes
is reached. Then at fifteen minutes past the hour he says, ‘Now find a third back corner of the
room. Hold on to three of the back corners of the room. Sit still, and don’t think.’ He repeats:
‘Hold on to three of the back corners of the room and sit still and don’t think’. At the half hour,
he says, ‘Now find all four back corners of the room, hold on, and don’t think’. He repeats
every few minutes, ‘The four back corners of the room and don’t think’. When the forty-five
minutes mark of the process has been reached, the auditor says, ‘Now locate the eight corners
of this room, hold on, and don’t think’, and repeats, ‘Eight corners, don’t think’, every few
minutes. At the hour mark, the process could be repeated. If so, do it again exactly as above.
SESSION 10: Description Processing should not be done on the groups, some of
whose members have questionable stability. Use only SESSIONS 1 to 6 on such groups.
When a group has been much run, almost any form of Description Processing can be used.
SESSION 10, however, consists entirely of one command which is not changed for at least
half an hour. This is, ‘How close does your body seem to you now?’ Pause. ‘How close does
your body seem to you now?’ Pause. ‘How close does your body seem to you now?’ and so
on.
In processing groups, duplication of command is part of the process.
Keep it simple. Grant them beingness. Keep them in contact with present time and out
of their facsimile bank and you’ll get group processing clears. Make it complicated, make them
‘figure’, be shy, and the group won’t come back. Never worry about boring them. The reason
they’re spun in is because ‘the body and the confusion were so interesting’.
120.GLOSSARY ADAPTED AND EXPANDED BY W.B.B. JR.
FROM ‘The Appositions of Scientology’ BY A.H.
ABERRATION
A sub-optimum or other-determined condition or consideration which a person is
unable to change at will.
ACCEPTANCE LEVEL
The acceptance level of a preclear is the condition in which a person or object must be,
in order that the preclear be able to accept it freely. (See REJECTION LEVEL.)
AFFINITY
A scale of attitude which falls away from the co-existence of Static, through the
interposition of distance and energy, to create identity, down to close proximity but mystery.
ALLY
A person who has aided in the survival of the preclear under engramic or highly
emotional circumstances, and whom the preclear reactively regards as important to his further
survival.
ANALYTICAL MIND
That part of a person’s thinking machinery and memories over which he has relatively
full control.
A-R-C
Affinity, Reality, and Communication: the component parts of understanding.
AUDITOR
A Scientologist: one whose technical skill is devoted to the resolution of the problems
of life.
AUDITOR’S CODE
The technical code of Scientology: a list of ‘do’s’ and ‘don’ts’ which experience has
shown insure optimum progress in auditing a case.
AXIOMS
Webster: ‘A statement of self-evident truth ... an established principle which is
universally received.’ The Axioms in Scientology, dating back to 1951, have been one of the
principle bases on which progress from that date has been made.
BARRIER
A consideration or idea that limits other considerations or ideas. This, of course,
includes emotional and physical universe barriers.
BOIL-OFF
A state of lessened awareness to the point of unconsciousness, caused by impaired
Havingness.
DOPE-OFF
is a state of lessened awareness, still above unconsciousness, and manifested
principally by communication-lag. Dope-off is also caused by impaired Havingness.
CHARGE
Energy being held in present time in relation to an incident or chain of incidents.
CHRONIC SOMATIC
121.A sub-optimum physical condition or a pain which resists change and remains over a
long period of time or recurs frequently.
CIRCUIT
A fixed energy pattern set up in an engram. The circuit, when restimulated, takes over
from the thetan operation of the organism.
CLEAR, THETA
An individual who, as a thetan, is certain of his identity apart from that of the body, and
who habitually operates the body from outside.
CODE OF HONOR
The ethical code of Scientology the code one uses, not because he has to, but because
he can afford such a luxury.
COMMUNICATION
The consideration and action of impelling an impulse or particle from source-point
across a distance to receipt-point, with the intention of bringing into being at the receipt-point a
duplication of that which emanated from the source-point. (See PERFECT DUPLICATE.)
COMMUNICATION, TWO-WAY
Two people alternating as cause and effect in the communication formula. Any sensory
perceptic can be utilized in establishing two-way communication. The establishment of certain
two-way communication is the first step in every auditing session, and nothing else is
attempted until this has been done.
COMMUNICATION LAG
The length of time between the moment the auditor poses the question and the moment
when the exact question posed is answered positively by the preclear, no matter whether silence
or talk or incorrect answers occur during the interim. It is also the length of time between the
giving of a command and the moment when a preclear carries out the exact command correctly.
CONSIDERATION
The highest capability of life, taking rank over the mechanics of Space, Energy, and
Time.
COPY
A duplicate, distinguished from a Perfect Duplicate, in that it does not necessarily
occupy the same space, same time, nor use the same energies as the original. (See PERFECT
DUPLICATE.)
CREATIVE PROCESSING
A process little used now except when making copies or perfect duplicates. It consists
of having the preclear make, with his own creative energies, a mock-up. (See MOCK-UP.)
DIANETICS
The first fully validated psycho-therapy. Dianetics dealt with the problems of homo
sapiens and was released to the public in 1950 after twenty years of research by its discoverer,
L. Ron Hubbard.
DICHOTOMY
A pair of opposites, such as black - white, good - evil, love - hate.
DRAMATIZATION
A carrying out by words or action of a fixed behavior pattern, which is repeated in a set
manner whenever restimulated. A dramatization is based upon the content of an engram.
DUPLICATE, PERFECT
122.A perfect duplicate is one which is made in the same time, in the same place, and with
the same energies as the original. The term ‘duplicate’ by itself is sometimes used to refer to a
‘copy’ which is a reproduction of the original, but not necessarily using the same space, time,
or energies. (A perfect duplicate is not a full communication. When it is used in
communication, it is the act of making something ‘communicate with itself’ and so causes its
Vanishment.) (See R2-40.) Duplication, or perfect duplication is the act of making a duplicate
or a perfect duplicate.
DYNAMIC
Any one of eight motivating drives along which each individual operates toward the
goal of survival. These are survival through 1. Self 2. Sex and family (future generations) 3.
Group (racial, geographical, national, etc.) 4. Mankind as a whole 5. Life forms6. MEST, (the
physical universe) 7. Spirits (individual thetans) 8. (Sometimes written on its side as infinity),
the Supreme Being, all Theta, the Life Static itself.
ELECTROPSYCHOMETER OR E-METER
An electronic instrument for measuring the psychological and emotional state of the
preclear and any changes that take place in this state.
EFFORT
Force with direction. A physical effort in the MEST universe.
EMOTION
A connector between thought and effort. It is a manifestation of beingness, and closely
related to motion. One handles motion on a direct ratio with his ability to handle emotion the
higher his emotion level, the more control he can exert over motion the lower his emotion level,
the more he succumbs to motion.
ENERGY
Postulated particles in space.
ENGRAM
From Dianetics. An experience containing pain, unconsciousness, and a real or fancied
threat to survival. An engram is to a greater or lesser degree unavailable to the conscious
awareness of the individual and its content has command value at the reactive level.
EXTERIORIZATION
The act of moving the thetan outside the body. When this is done the person achieves
a certainty of his beingness or identity completely apart from that of the body.
FACSIMILE
A recording in energy of an incident or part of an incident from the past. The facsimile
contains all the perceptics of the original. It is an involuntary duplicate or copy (not a perfect
duplicate).
GENETIC ENTITY
Sometimes referred to as the GE. The entity or machine set up to carry out the automatic
functions of the body. This entity or machine in a lower level case may work at considerable
cross-purposes with the thetan.
GRAND TOUR
A process used on an exteriorized thetan to free him from the craving for mass and to
bring into present time a greater portion of the MEST universe.
HAVINGNESS
Mass occupying the same space as the preclear. Over his total experience the preclear
has become accustomed to having or identifying himself with considerable mass, both in the
form of physical universe matter and in the form of energy masses such as facsimiles. Until the
123.thetan has rehabilitated his considerations that he can create mass at will, the loss of any mass
causes discomfort and lessened awareness. When havingness is remedied by having the
preclear bring in masses these symptoms disappear.
‘I’
The thetan, the center of awareness, that part of the total organism that is fundamentally
cause.
INVALIDATION
A statement, action or inference that makes the preclear appear wrong. Invalidation,
along with evaluation, i.e. pressing on the preclear an other-determined consideration, are the
two ‘shuns’ to be most strenuously avoided by the auditor.
INVERSION
A switch to an opposite obsessive consideration such as from compulsion to inhibition.
There may be many inversions on any consideration, each leading further from Self-Determinism.
KEY-IN
The incident that first brings about restimulation of an engram. For the key-in of an
engram, there must be some degree of lessened awareness plus a similarity of situation to that
of the engram. However, Once an engram is keyed in a similarity of situation alone is enough
to restimulate it.
LIE
A second postulate, statement, or condition, designed to mask a primary postulate
which is permitted to remain.
LIFE-CONTINUUM
One individual attempting to carry on the life of another deceased individual by means
of generating in his own body the infirmities and mannerisms of the deceased and by patterning
his life in a manner which appears to him to be a continuation of the pattern of the deceased.
This condition usually comes about when there have been real or fancied overt acts by the
individual against the deceased.
LINE CHARGE
A prolonged spell of uncontrolled laughter or crying which may be continued for
several hours. Once started a line charge can usually be reinforced by the occasional interjection
of almost any word or phrase by the auditor. The line charge usually signals the sudden release
of a large amount of charge and brings about a marked change in the case.
LOCK
An apparently minor incident which assumes an unreasonable importance due to its
containing some similarity to, and restimulating, an earlier engram or engram chain. Also, an
incident containing enforcement or inhibition of Affinity, Reality, or Communication.
MATTER
Grouped particles of energy located in a relatively stable relationship to one another.
MEST
The initial letters of Matter, Energy, Space, and Time the Scientological term for the
physical universe.
MIND
The machines, circuits, facsimiles, memories, etc., which are used in the individual’s
thinking processes. The mind is not a part of the thetan and is not necessary for the higher-level
activities of the thetan. (See THOUGHT, THINKINGNESS.)
124.MOCK-UP
A full-perceptic energy picture in three dimensions, created by the thetan, and having
location in space and time. A mock-up is distinct from a facsimile in that it is created
volitionally, does not necessarily copy any previous experience, and is under the full control of
the preclear.
MOTIVATOR
An overt act by another determinism against the preclear. A person tends to keep overt
acts and motivators balanced up. If he commits too many overt acts he will seek motivators and
vice versa.
NECESSITY LEVEL
The degree of emergency in the present time environment. When, in a state of
emergency, the survival of the organism depends on the changing of certain aberrated patterns
of behavior, these patterns are sometimes temporarily cast aside, allowing the individual to act
at a much higher level than his chronic one.
NOTHINGNESS
Absence of everything no time, no space, no energy, no thought, etc. A specific
nothingness, such as a nothingness of chairs, is just that, absolutely no chairs. A specific
nothingness is usually qualified as to time and space.
OCCLUSION
Something hidden, an occlusion of memory is something forgotten, i.e., not available
to conscious recall. An occluded case is one whose memory is usually largely occluded and
whose field of awareness is black or very dark.
ORGANISM
A physical manifestation of Life a material form organized and controlled by theta.
ORIENTATION POINT
A point of reference from which the position of other objects is judged. People are often
found still using orientation points from childhood which may be thousands of miles from their
present time location. The goal of Scientology is that the thetan be his own principal orientation
point, and that he have the ability to use or discard any other point of reference.
OVERT ACT
The administration of pain or destruction to another organism. The theory of overt acts
and motivators opens a new field of understanding of human behavior. (See MOTIVATOR.)
PAN-DETERMINISM
The ability to regulate the considerations of two or more identities, whether or not they
are opposed. A much broader concept than Self-Determinism, since the latter makes a
randomity of anything not considered ‘self’.
PERCEPTION
Any means of communicating below the level of knowingness. There are more than
fifty perceptions used by the physical body, the best-known of which are sight, hearing, touch,
taste, and smell.
POSTULATE
A decision regarding a state of beingness. A consideration. (See CONSIDERATION.)
PRECLEAR
Technically this covers anyone who is not a clear. However, it is principally used to
describe a person undergoing processing with the techniques of Scientology.
PSYCHOTIC
125.A person completely out of present time and out of agreement with his environment and
those around him.
RANDOMITY
The ratio of unpredicted motion to predicted motion. Something one picks out and
agrees not to predict. At very low case levels it appears that everything is randomity, but as the
case level rises it can actually reach a point where the preclear fears that he is approaching too
little randomity to find life still interesting.
REACTIVE MIND
That portion of a person’s mind which is not under his volitional command or recall,
and which exerts the power of command over his thinking and actions. (See CIRCUIT.)
REALITY
The agreed-upon apparency of existence.
RECALL
The re-experiencing of the perceptions of past incidents.
REJECTION LEVEL
The condition in which a person or object must be in order that the preclear be able to
reject it freely. (See ACCEPTANCE LEVEL.)
RELEASE
The state of a preclear, who, while not necessarily clear, has resolved his chronic
somatic and/or his major problems. Also, the resolution of a specific problem or chronic
somatic. This term is not used very frequently in Scientology.
RESPONSIBILITY
To accept responsibility for something is to accept that one operated as cause in the
matter. Responsibility refers solely to cause and not to other considerations such as goodness
or badness of the thing caused. It should be clearly distinguished from such lower level
considerations as blame, praise, etc., which include further evaluation.
SANITY
The degree to which an individual is able to operate with Self-Determinism, or above
this, with Pan-Determinism. An individual is as un-sane as he is motivated by other-determinism.
Sanity is also measured by the degree to which the individual accepts
responsibility for himself, his actions, and his environment.
SCIENTOLOGY
The Science of knowing how to know answers. It is a wisdom in the tradition of
10,000 years of search in Asia and Western Civilization. It is the Science of Human Affairs,
which treats the livingness and beingness of Man and demonstrates to him a pathway to greater
freedom.
SELF-DETERMINISM The ability to regulate and take responsibility for one’s own
considerations. Motivation by the thetan rather than by the environment. A low-level case is
determined almost entirely by its present and past environments. The goal of processing is to
restore to him Self-Determinism, and above this Pan-Determinism.
SOMATIC
A pain, the physical origin of which is in the past. The pain may have perfectly valid
present time causes, such as constriction of the blood vessels, tensions in the muscles, etc.
However, the original injury to the body by the environment is not in present time, but has
been restimulated by something in the present environment similar to that at the time of the
original injury. Somatic is also used to refer to a sub-optimum physical condition, the origin of
which is in the past.
126.SPACE
A viewpoint of dimension.
STATIC
A Static has no mass, no motion, no wave-length, and no position in space or time, no
meaning, and no mobility. While a Static may have qualities, it has no quantities.
STRAIGHT WIRE
This term refers to processes using direct memory. Term taken by analogy from
electronic communication systems.
SYMBOL Anything having Mass, Meaning, and Mobility.
THETA
The only known Static. (See STATIC.)
THETAN
The energy and space-production unit for the body. A Static with the ability to
consider, postulate, and have opinions, that has, through postulates and considerations,
developed a differentiation from the Static, theta. The thetan is the ‘I’, the individual, that force,
not a part of the physical universe, which is directing the organism.
THINKINGNESS
The potential of considering.
THOUGHT
As a colloquialism ‘thought’ is seen to embrace all of Life. In Scientology ‘thought’
refers to everything below Effort on the scale of KNOW, LOOK, EMOTE, EFFORT, THINK,
SYMBOL, EAT, SEX, and MYSTERY.
TIME
The postulate that space and particles will persist.
TIME, PRESENT
The agreed-upon consideration regarding the relationship of the particles that form the
MEST universe at any given instant, for that instant.
TONE
A level of sanity based on the Tone Scale.
TONE SCALE
A Scale measuring Sanity and relating the various factors of behavior, emotion, and
thought, to levels on the scale. The tone scale was first put into relatively complete form in
1951 by its discoverer, L. Ron Hubbard, in his book ‘The Science of Survival’. It was found
to be more accurate in predicting the behavior of individuals than even its discoverer had
supposed, and has been an invaluable tool in the hands of Scientologists.
TRUTH
Th exact consideration. (See CONSIDERATION.)
TRUTH, BASIC
The technical name for Ultimate Truth. (See ULTIMATE TRUTH.)
TRUTH, ULTIMATE
A Static. (See STATIC.)
VALENCE
127.The assumption, at the reactive level, by one individual of the characteristics of another
individual. An individual may have a number of valences which he puts on and off as he might
hats. Often these changes are so marked that an observant person can notice him dropping one
valence and putting on another. The shift from valence to valence is usually completely outside
the awareness and control of the individual doing so. In other cases an individual has one
valence, not his own, in which he is thoroughly stuck.
VALENCE, WINNING
The assumption by an individual in a particular situation, of the characteristics of
another individual, who, in the consideration of the first, was habitually successful in similar
situations. For example: if the preclear’s father was domineering toward the mother, and
usually got his own way, it would be quite common to find the preclear assuming the Valence
of his father in his dealings with his wife, or even with women in general.
VIEWPOINT
A point from which to view. The first consideration of a thetan in creation is the
assumption of a Viewpoint from which to view that to be created.
VIEWPOINT, REMOTE
A viewpoint without the consideration by the thetan that he is located at that point. The
thetan may have any number of remote viewpoints.
ADAPTED AND EXPANDED BY W.B.B. JR., FROM ‘The Appositions of
Scientology’
BY A.H.
Ответить

Вернуться в «L Ron Hubbard original BOOKs»